13 .uno%3AClosePreview 3a To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button.
13 .uno%3APrintPreview 3d Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fpath 69 Ја наведува патеката за зачувување на обрасците за писма.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fsinglejobs 5f Го печати секое писмо на избраниот печатач, посебно.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Ffile 4f Ги зачувува обрасците за писма во датотеки.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fprinter 35 Ги печати обрасците за писма.
12 .uno%3AMergeDialog c6 Го отвора дијалогот за циркуларни писма кој што ви помага при печатењето и зачувувањето на обрасци на писма.
27 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fto 5e Го наведува бројот на последниот запис за печатење.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TLB_TREELISTBOX 1d Inserts a row into the table.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fsingledocument 3d Click to create one big document containing all data records.
27 SW%3AEDIT%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3AED_FILENAME ac Го креира името на датотеката врз база на текстот што сте го внеле, проследено со сериски број.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fpathpb 43 Го отвора дијалогот Изберете патека.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Findividualdocuments 37 Click to create one document for every one data record.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Ffield af Ја користи содржината на избраното поле со податоци, како име на датотека за образецот за писмо.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fall 58 Ги обработува сите записи од базата на податоци.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fgenerate 3a Generate each file name from data contained in a database.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fmailmerge%2Ffileformat 1d Inserts a row into the table.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Frbfrom 6f Одредува кои записи да се вклучат во вашиот образец за писмо.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Fselected 10e Ги обработува само означените записи од базата на податоци. Оваа опција е достапна само ако претходно сте ги маркирале потребните записи во базата.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailmerge%2Ffrom 56 Го наведува бројот на првиот запис за печатење.
1e .uno%3ASendOutlineToStarImpres 99 Ги испраќа краткиот преглед на активниот документ, во нов документ за презентација.
1d .uno%3ASendOutlineToClipboard 9e Го испраќа краткиот преглед од документот, до таблата со исечоци во во Rich Text формат (RTF).
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fabstractdialog%2Fparas eb Наведете го максималниот број на последователни пасуси кои ќе бидат вклучени во документот за авто. апстракт, по секое заглавие.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fabstractdialog%2Foutlines 93 Внесете го степенот на нивоата на прегледи што ќе се копираат во новиот документ
15 .uno%3ACreateAbstract 14d Ги копира заглавијата и одреден број наредни пасусии од активниот документ во нов Авто. апстракт документ . Наредбата Авто. апстракт е корисна за добивање преглед на долги документи.
1e .uno%3ASendAbstractToStarImpre 11c Го отвора тековниот документ како презентација во $[officename] Impress. Тековниот документ мора да содржи барем еден претходно дефиниран стил за заглавие на пасус.
23 HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE be Изберете го стилот на заглавие на пасус што сакате да го користитем, кој ќе наведува на нова HTML-страница.
11 .uno%3ANewHtmlDoc 17e Ја зачувува датотеката како HTML-документ, за да може да ја прегледате во веб-прелистувач. Може да изберете да се креира посебна страница во случаи кога во документот ќе се среќава стил на пасус што сте го навеле.
15 HID_NAVIGATOR_LISTBOX 214 Ги набројува имињата на сите отворени текстуални документи. За да ја прегледате листата документи во прозорецот на Навигаторот, изберете име на документот во листата. Тековниот докуменот што е прикажан во Навигаторот е означен со зборот  "активен " испишан по името на документот во листата.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdemotelvl d1 Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Flistbox 22 Shows or hides the Navigator list.
11 HID_NAVI_OUTLINES ef Кликнете 1 за да ги гледате само оние заглавија од највисоко ниво во прозорецот на Навигаторот или 10 за да ги видите сите заглавија.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fnumericfield 52 Type the number of the page number that you want to jump to, and then press Enter.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fpromote f3 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fforward a3 Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images".
19 SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_TREELIST 121 Shows or hides the Navigator window, where you can quickly jump to different parts of your document. Navigator is also available as a deck of the Sidebar. You can also use the Navigator to insert elements from the current document or other open documents, and to organize master documents.
11 HID_NAVI_DRAG_HYP 146 Создава хиперврска кога повлекувате и пуштате елемент во тековниот документ. Кликнете на хиперврската во документот за да скокнете на елементот на кој што упатува хиперврската.
10 .uno%3ANavigator 121 Shows or hides the Navigator window, where you can quickly jump to different parts of your document. Navigator is also available as a deck of the Sidebar. You can also use the Navigator to insert elements from the current document or other open documents, and to organize master documents.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fnavigation 189 Ја отвора Алатката за навигација, кадешто можете брзо да скокате на наредниот елемент од предходниот во категоријата која сте ја обрале. Изберете ја категоријата и потоа кликнете на стрелките"Предходен" и "Нареден".
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fcontenttoggle 86 Префрла помеѓу главен поглед и нормален, ако главниот документ е отворен.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fback a7 Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Images".
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdragmode b5 Sets the drag and drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Froot 5a Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdemote f5 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Freminder 212 Кликнете тука за да поставите потсетник на тековната позиција на покажувачот.Можете да поставите најмногу пет потсетници. За да скокнете до потсетникот, кликнете Навигација иконата во Навигација прозорецот кликнете на Потсетник иконата и потоа кликнете на Претходен или Нареден копчето.
12 HID_NAVI_DRAG_COPY 127 Вметнува копија на избраниот елемент кога влечете и пуштате во тековниот документ. Не може да влечете и пуштате копии на графика, OLE -објекти, референци и индекси.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Ffooter 4d Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fglobaltoggle 86 Префрла помеѓу главен поглед и нормален, ако главниот документ е отворен.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fanchor 38 Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor.
12 HID_NAVI_DRAG_LINK 285 Го вметнува избраниот елемент како врска кога влечете и пуштате во тековниот документ. Текстот се вметнува во форма на заштитен дел. Содржината на врската се ажурира автоматски кога ќе се измени изворот. За рачно да ги освежите врските во документот изберете Алатки - Ажурирај - Врски. Не може да креирате врски за графика, OLE-објекти, референци и индекси.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fpromotelvl d1 Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fheader 4d Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fheadings 74 Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window.
e SW_HID_NID_TBL 61 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ табели.
1e SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA_ERROR 90 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ погрешените формули во табелите.
e SW_HID_NID_FTN 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ фуснотите.
b HID_NAVI_VS 222 Кликнете на иконата за типот на објекти кои што сакате да ги прегледувате. Потоа кликнете на едно од копчињата со стрелки "Претходен објект" или " Следен објект". Имињата на овие копчиња укажуваат на типот на објект што сте го избрале. Текстуалниот курсорот се става на секој објект што сте го избрале.
e SW_HID_NID_PGE 65 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ страници.
e SW_HID_NID_SEL 76 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ направениот избор.
e SW_HID_NID_DRW 7a Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ нацртаните предмети.
16 SW_HID_NID_INDEX_ENTRY 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ индексите.
e SW_HID_NID_GRF 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ графиките.
e SW_HID_NID_FRM 74 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ текстуални рамки.
d HID_SCRL_NAVI 145 Ако кликнете на оваа икона во Навигаторот или на долниот десен раб од прозорецот на документот, ќе се појави алатник што ви овозможува да ги изберете постојните цели во документ.
e SW_HID_NID_OLE 6b Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ OLE-објектите.
f SW_HID_NID_CTRL 78 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ контролните полиња.
e SW_HID_NID_BKM 6f Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ обележувачите.
11 HID_SCRL_PAGEDOWN 91 Кликнете на копчето надолу за да се придвижите на следната страница или објект.
11 SW_HID_NID_POSTIT 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ белешките.
f HID_SCRL_PAGEUP 97 Кликнете на копчето нагоре за да се придвижите на претходната страница или објект.
18 SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA 75 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ формули од табели.
f SW_HID_NID_MARK 6d Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ потсетниците.
f SW_HID_NID_NEXT 6b Го поставува курсорот на следниот објект од избраниот тип.
f SW_HID_NID_OUTL 69 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ заглавјата.
f SW_HID_NID_PREV 71 Го поставува курсорот на претходниот објект од избраниот тип.
e SW_HID_NID_REG 61 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ делови.
13 SW_HID_NID_SRCH_REP 8b Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ резултатите од пребарувањето.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Frename ea Го отвора дијалогот Преименувај Автоматски Текст, кадешто можете да го промените името на избраниот влез во Автоматскиот Текст
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Freplace c4 Ја заменува содржината на избраниот елемент на авто. текст со изборот што е направен во тековниот документ.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fname 17d Го прикажува името на АвтоТекст категориите. За да го промените името на категоријата, впишете ново име, а потоа кликнете наПреименувај. За да создадете нова категорија, впишете и име, а потоа кликнете на Ново.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Frename a9 Го менува името на избраната АвтоТекст категорија со името на кое сте го внеле во полетоИме .
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fcopy 62 Го копира избраниот авто. текст на таблата со исечоци.
13 .uno%3AEditGlossary 1d0 Креира, уредува или вметнува авто.текст. Може да го зачувате форматираниот текст, текстот од графиката, табелите или полињата како авто. текст. За брзо внесување на авто. текст внесете ја кратенката на авто. текстот од вашиот документ и потоа притиснете F3.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fnewtext d5 Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fautotext 11b Кликнете за да ви се прикажат дополнителни наредби на авто. текст, на пример за да креирате нов авто. текст запис од веќе избрантекст во тековниот документ.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fname 160 Го прикажува името на тековно избраниот елемент на авто. текст. Ако имате избран текст во документот напишете го името на новиот авто. текст, кликнете на копчетоАвто. текст и потоа изберете Нов.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2FEditCategoriesDialog 64 Додава, преименува или ги брише АвтоТекст категориите.
27 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fnew 183 Креира нов елемент на авто текст од изборот што сте го направиле во тековниот документ. Елементот е додаден во тековната избрана категорија на автом. текст. Прво мора да внесете име пред да ја видите оваа наредба.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Finsert 262 Прикажува предлог за комплетирање на збор како Помошен Совет откако ќе ги напишете првите три букви што се поклопуваат со влезот во Автоматскиот Текст. За да го прифатите предлогот притиснете Enter. ако повеќе од еден влезови во Автоматскиот Текст се поклопуваат со буквите кои сте ги испишале притиснете Ctrl+Tab за движење низ влезовите.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fcategories 64 Додава, преименува или ги брише АвтоТекст категориите.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fedit 137 Го отвора избраниот АвтоТекст за уредување во посебен документ. Направете ги саканите промени, одберете Датотека - Зачувај АвтоТекст, а потоа одберете Датотека - Затвори.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fmacro c0 Го отвора Додели Макро дијалогот, каде штоможете да додадете макро на избраниот влез Автоматскиот Текст.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fpath df Го отвора дијалогот Одберете Патеки, каде што можете да го изберете директориумот каде ќе го зачувате Автоматскиот текст.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fimport ef Отвора дијалог каде можете да изберете меѓу MS 97/2000/XP Word доклумент или шаблон, кои ги содржи Автотекстовите кои сакате да ги увезете.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fpathlb 179 Ја прикажува тековната патека до директориумот каде се запишани избраните АвтоТекст категории. Ако создавате АвтоТекст категории, изберете го местото каде сакате да ги зачувате датотеките со категориите.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fnew a3 Создава нова АвтоТекст категорија со користење на името на кое сте го внеле во полето Име
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fgroup 85 Ги набројува постојните АвтоТекст категории и нивните соодветни патеки.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Frelnet 57 Врските до датотеките на интернет се релативни.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fshortname ff Ја прикажува кратенката за избраниот елемент на авто. текст. Ако креирате нов авто. текст напишете ја кратенката што сакате да ја користите.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Frelfile 86 Врските до автоматските текст датотеки на вашиот компјутер се релативни.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2Fnewsc 72 Доделува кратенка до избраниот елемент на Автоматскиот текст.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2Fnewname 76 Внеси го новото име на избраната компонента на Автоматски текст.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2Foldname 6d Го прикажува тековниото име на избраниот автоматски текст .
1d .uno%3AAuthoritiesEntryDialog 26 Edits the selected bibliography entry.
13 HID_DLG_FLDEDT_PREV 3d Jumps to the previous field of the same type in the document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fnumformat b2 Select the format for the contents of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additional formats" in the list, and then choose a different format.
13 HID_DLG_FLDEDT_NEXT 39 Jumps to the next field of the same type in the document.
12 .uno%3AFieldDialog 75 Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of a field. Click in front of a field, and then choose this command.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fprev 41 Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fnext 3d Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
13 .uno%3AEditFootnote 77 Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fnext 3f Jumps to the next index entry of the same type in the document.
17 .uno%3AIndexEntryDialog 66 Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Flast 3f Jumps to the last index entry of the same type in the document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ftypecb 3e Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fprevious 43 Jumps to the previous index entry of the same type in the document.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fentryed 9e Edit the index entry if necessary. When you modify the index entry, the new text only appears in the index, and not at the index entry anchor in the document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fkey1cb 9d To create a multilevel index, type the name of the first level index entry, or select a name from the list. The current index entry is added below this name.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fdelete 59 Deletes the selected entry from the index. The entry text in the document is not deleted.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fkey2cb 80 Type the name of the second level index entry, or select a name from the list. The current index entry is added below this name.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Flevelnf 37 Changes the outline level of a table of contents entry.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ffirst 40 Jumps to the first index entry of the same type in the document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fremove a6 Го отстранува избраниот Дел од документот и ја вметнува содржината на Делот во документот.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Ftree 104 Го отвора дијалоготОпции каде можете да го измените изгледот на колоните, позадината, однесувањето на фуснотите и забелешките, избраниот Дел.
11 .uno%3AEditRegion 76 Ги менува својствата на деловите кој се поставени во документот.
c .uno%3ARuler 4c Contains a submenu for showing or hiding the horizontal and vertical rulers.
11 .uno%3AViewBounds 62 Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed.
c .uno%3AMarks 76 Shows or hides shadings around fields in your document like non-breaking spaces, soft hyphens, indexes, and footnotes.
11 .uno%3AFieldnames 3f Switches between showing fields as field names or field values.
13 .uno%3AControlCodes 6a Shows hidden formatting symbols in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces.
11 .uno%3ABrowseView 3d Displays the document as it would be viewed in a Web browser.
12 .uno%3APrintLayout 36 Displays how the document will look when you print it.
1b .uno%3AShowHiddenParagraphs 21 Shows or hides hidden paragraphs.
26 SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ADLG_BREAK%3ACB_PAGENUM 192 Го доделува бројот на страницата којшто сте го посочиле на страната која следува по рачниот прелом. Оваа опција е достапна ако доделите различен стил на страница на страницата која следува по рачниот прелом на страница.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fstylelb 46 Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break.
26 SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_PAGE 175 Внесува рачно прелом на страница и го поместува текстот десно од курсорот на почетокот на наредната страница. Внесениот прелом на страница е покажан  со граница која не се печатина врвот од новата страна.
25 SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_COL 19a Внесува рачно прелом на колона (при приказ со повеќе колони) и го поместува текстот десно од курсорот на почетокот на нареднатаколона.Рачниот прелом на колона е прикажан со граница која не се печати на врвот од новата колона.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fpagenumsb 4a Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break.
26 SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_LINE d1 Ја завршува тековната линија и го поместува текстот десно од курсорот во наредната линија, без креирање нов пасус.
12 .uno%3AInsertBreak 59 Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position.
18 FN_INSERT_COLUMN_SECTION 297 Внесете секција од текст на позицијата на покажувачот во документот. Можете да изберете дел од текстот и потоа да ја изберете оваа команда за да креирате секција. Можете да ги употребувате секциите за да внесете делови од текст од други документи, да внесете сопствени изгледи на колоните или да ги заштитите или скриете блоковите од текст ако условот е исполнет.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fcondition 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fdde a3 Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Ffilename 74 Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button to locate the file.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Ffilename 74 Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button to locate the file.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fdde a3 Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fpassword 39 Opens a dialog where you can change the current password.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Flink 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fsection 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fprotect 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fwithpassword 60 Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Flink 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fcurname 20 Type a name for the new section.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fwithcond 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Ffile 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fsectionname 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fselectpassword 39 Opens a dialog where you can change the current password.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2FEditSectionDialog 7 Section
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2FSectionPage 7 Section
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fprotect 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fhide 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fselectfile 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fwithpassword 60 Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fhide 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findentpage%2Fafter 73 Го специфицира вовлекувањето по секцијата, на десната маргина.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findentpage%2Fbefore 75 Го специфицира вовлекувањето пред секцијата, на левата маргина.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fendnote d2 Внесува котва на енднота на тековната позиција на курсорот во документот и додава енднота на крајот од документот.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Ffootnote d8 Внесува котва за фуснота на тековната позиција на покажувачот во документот или додава фуснота на дното на станицата.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fchoosecharacter 5c Внесува специјален знак  како фуснота или енднота.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fcharacterentry 8e Одберете ја оваа опција зада дефинирате знак или симбол за тековната фуснота.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fautomatic 57 Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert.
15 .uno%3AInsertFootnote 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2Fdelete 8a To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Insert Bookmark dialog and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2Fbookmarks 170 Напишете го името на обележувачот кој сакате ад го креирате. Листата подолу ги содржи сите обележувачи во тековниот документ.За да избришете обележувач, изберете го од листата и потоа кликнетеИзбриши.
15 .uno%3AInsertBookmark 81 Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fauto 88 Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fposition a2 Го става насловот над или под избраниот елемент. Оваа опција е достапна за некои објекти.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fnum_separator_edit 7c Напишете го текстот кој сакате да се појавува по бројот на насловот.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fseparator_edit ad Внесете текстуални знаци по ваша желба, кои ќе се појават меѓу бројките во текстот на насловот.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fnumbering 82 Изберете го видот на нумерирање кој сакате да го користете во насловот.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fcategory 1e3 Изберете ја категоријата за наслови, или напишете име за да креирате нова категорија Текстот од категоријата се појавува пред бројот на насловот во ознаката на насловот. Секоја претходно дефинирана категорија за наслови е форматирана со стил на пасус со исто име.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2FInsertCaptionDialog 4b Adds a numbered caption to a selected image, table, chart, frame, or shape.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Fborder_and_shadow 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Fstyle 33 Го одредува стилот на знаци.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Fseparator a6 Внесете го знакот кој сакате да го вметнете меѓу бројот на поглавјето и бројот на насловот.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Flevel e8 Изберете го бројот од нивото на главни црти од горе надолу во хиерархијата на поглавја за да го вклучите во ознаките на наслови
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Foptions c2 Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document.
12 HID_ENVELOP_INSERT 69 Го вметнува пликот пред тековната страница во документот
11 HID_ENVELOP_PRINT 4b Креира нов документ и го вметнува пликот.
15 .uno%3AInsertEnvelope 16 Креира плик.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Finsert 199 изберете го полето од базата на податоци кое ги содржи податоците за адреси кои сакате да ги вметнете ,а потоа кликнете на копчето со стрелка налево. Податоците се додаваат во полето со адреси што е позициониран покажувачот.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Ftable bc Изберете ја табелата од база на податоци која ги содржи податоците за адреси кои сакате да ги вметнете.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Fdatabase aa Изберете ја базата на податоци која ги содржи податоците со адреси кои сакате да ги вметнете.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Fsenderedit 6b Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return  address.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Faddredit 3b Внесете ја адресата на примачот.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2FEnvAddressPage 11e Внесете ја доставата и повратната адреса на пликот.Исто така можете да вметнете полиња со адреси од база на податоци, на пример од базата на податоци Адреси.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fwidth 37 Внесете ја ширината на пликот.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fheight 37 Внесете ја висината на пликот.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fsenderedit bc Кликнете и изберете го стилот на форматирање на текст за полето на испраќачот кое сакате да го уредите.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fleftsender ac Внесете го растојанието кое сакате да го оставите меѓу работ на пликот и полето на испраќачот.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Faddredit bc Кликнете и изберете го стилот за форматирање на текст за полето на испраќачот кое сакате да го уредите.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Ftopaddr ad Внесете колку растојание сакате да оставите меѓу горниот раб на плокот и полето за испраќачот.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fformat 10c Изберете ги саканите димензии на пликот или изберете „Дефинирано од корисникот“, а потоа внесете ја ширината и висината на поставените димензии.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fleftaddr b0 Внесете колку растојание  сакате да оставите помеѓу левиот раб на пликот и полето за испраќачот.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Ftopsender b7 Внесете го растојанието кое сакате да го оставите меѓу горниот раб на пликот и полето на испраќачот.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2FEnvFormatPage 51 Ги одредува изгледот и димензиите на пликот.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2FEnvPrinterPage 4f Поставете ги опциите за печатење на пликот.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fhorileft 80 Го внесува пликот хоризонтално од левиот раб на фиоката на печатачот .
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fhoricenter 7d Го внесува пликот хоризонтално од центарот на фиоката  на печатачот.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fvertleft 7b Го внесува пликот вертикално од левиот раб на фиоката на печатачот.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fbottom 45 Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fright 88 Внесете на кое растојание треба да се помести областа за печатење надесно.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fdown 86 Внесете на кое растојание треба да се помести областа на печатење надолу.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fvertcenter 77 Го внесува пликот вертикално од центарот на фиоката на печатачот
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fsetup 121 Го отвара дијалогот Поставување на печатач каде што можете да дефинирате дополнителни поставувања на печатачот, на пример ориентација и формат на хартијата.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fvertright 7d Го внесува пликот вертикално од десниот раб на фиоката на печатачот.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fhoriright 7f Го внесува пликот хоризонтално од левиот раб на фиоката на печатачот.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Ftop 86 Го внесува пликот со страната за печатење нагоре во фиоката на печатачот.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffielddialog%2Fcancel 1d Inserts a row into the table.
10 HID_FIELD_INSERT 17b Го вметнува избраното поле на позицијата на покажувачот во документот.Можете да вметнувате полиња во Вашиот документ додека е отворен овој дијалог. За да го затворите дијалогот, кликнете на копчето Затвори.
12 .uno%3AInsertField 119 Вметнува поле на позицијата на покажувачот. Полињата содржат информации кои може да бидат автоматски ажурирани,како што се датум,час или број на станица.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fformat 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Foffset 41 Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined fields.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fvalue 57 Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1".
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Flevel 50 Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Ffixed 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fselect 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fvalue 1d Inserts a row into the table.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fname 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fformat 48 Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fselect 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
26 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2FFldRefPage bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
1b .uno%3AInsertReferenceField bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
26 SW_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_FLD_DROPDOWN_PB_NEXT 42 Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available.
26 SW_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_FLD_DROPDOWN_PB_EDIT 4e Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list.
28 SW_LISTBOX_DLG_FLD_DROPDOWN_LB_LISTITEMS 48 Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Flistname 27 Enter a unique name for the Input list.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fvalue 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fdown 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fadd 1a Adds the Item to the list.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fcondition 3a For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fup 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fcond2 8b Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fmacro 79 Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fremove 28 Removes the selected item from the list.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fitem 11 Enter a new item.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Flistitems 3b Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2b SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKSELECTION 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2Ffixed 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2FFldDocInfoPage 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fdelete 7d Removes the user-defined field from the selection list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2FFldVarPage 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fvalue 40 Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fname 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fformat 48 In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Flevel 52 Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fselect 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Finvisible 29 Hides the field contents in the document.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fapply 32 Adds the user-defined field to the Selection list.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fseparator 5d Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintmergedialog%2FPrintMergeDialog d1 When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialog asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialog opens where you can select the database records to print.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fbrowse 82 Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Ffromdatabasecb 31 Uses the format defined in the selected database.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Frecnumber 62 Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fcondition 3a For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fselect 54 Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fformat 29 Lists the available user-defined formats.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fuserdefinedcb 47 Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2FFldDbPage 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finputfielddialog%2Fnext 2e Jumps to the next input field in the document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finputfielddialog%2Ftext b5 The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialog. The lower box displays the contents of the field.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finputfielddialog%2FInputFieldDialog 4f Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Finsert 22 Marks an index entry in your text.
19 .uno%3AInsertIndexesEntry 3c Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fsearchcasewordonlycb 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
23 HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PHONETIC_READING f9 Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ftypecb 33 Select the index that you want to add the entry to.
1b HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PRIM_KEY b2 Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold".
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnewuserindexdialog%2FNewUserIndexDialog 70 Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables.
16 HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_NEW 53 Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index.
18 HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_ENTRY a6 Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed.
1a HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_SEC_KEY c9 Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold".
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Flevelnf c9 Entries using the paragraph format "Heading X" (X = 1-10) can be automatically added to the table of contents. The level of the entry in the index corresponds to the outline level of the heading style.
1d HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_MAIN_ENTRY 40 Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index.
1c HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_APPLY_ALL 8f Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fsearchcasesensitivecb 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
17 .uno%3AInsertMultiIndex 47 Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fedit 54 Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fdefault 4d Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fassign 43 Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fstyles 74 Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Flevels 39 Select the index level that you change the formatting of.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Findexmarks 79 Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry in the index.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromheadings 96 Creates the index using outline levels, that is, paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fstyles 62 Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Faddstylescb e1 Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Flevel 3b Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fscope 4f Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Freadonly 36 Prevents the contents of the index from being changed.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ftitle 25 Enter a title for the selected index.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ftype 31 Select the type of index that you want to insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromfile 64 Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fkeyasentry 2d Inserts index keys as separate index entries.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffile 2b Select, create, or edit a concordance file.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Finitcaps 3d Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fkeytype aa Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fusedash d2 Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12".
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fuseff 12b Replaces identical index entries that occur on the same page, or consecutive pages, with a single entry that lists the page number with a "p" or "pp" where the entry first occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 10" as "View 10p).
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Flang 3f Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcasesens 7f Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcombinesame c3 Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43".
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fobjnames 28 Creates index entries from object names.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fdisplay 46 Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcategory 47 Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcaptions 2b Creates index entries from object captions.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fuselevel 78 Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromoles 22 Includes OLE objects in the index.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromframes 22 Includes text frames in the index.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromgraphics 1f Includes graphics in the index.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromtables 1d Includes tables in the index.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fobjects 47 Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fbrackets 42 Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fnumberentries 2f Automatically numbers the bibliography entries.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fassignstylesdialog%2Fright 49 Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fassignstylesdialog%2Fleft 47 Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fassignstylesdialog%2FAssignStylesDialog 35 Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2FTocEntriesPage 94 Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index that you selected on the Type tab.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Freltostyle c1 Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fnumberformat 7d Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ftabstoppos 4a Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ftoken 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Falignright 2d Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fcharstyle 49 Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fentrytext 28 Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ftabstop de Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fchapterno a4 Inserts the complete chapter heading, including, if available, the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fedit 3f Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fhyperlink 182 Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fpageno 25 Inserts the page number of the entry.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fall 46 Applies the current settings to all levels without closing the dialog.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ffillchar 28 Select the tab leader that you want use.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fcommasep 41 Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Falphadelim 5a Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fmainstyle cf Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fentryoutlinelevel 59 Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fchapterentry 4b Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fchapterinfo 8e Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fkey3lb 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fremove 3c Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Finsert a2 Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fdown3cb 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fup3cb 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fsortcontents 73 Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fsortpos 5d Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document.
2a SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_AUTHFIELD 3c Use the Define Bibliography Entry dialog to add new entries.
1d HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHORITY_TYPE 2d Select the source for the bibliography entry.
19 HID_AUTH_FIELD_IDENTIFIER 80 Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry.
16 HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM4 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcreateauthorentry%2FCreateAuthorEntryDialog 2b Change the content of a bibliography entry.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcreateautomarkdialog%2FCreateAutomarkDialog 43 Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index.
20 HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_CREATE_ENTRY db Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
1e HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_EDIT_ENTRY 5f Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record.
1d HID_AUTH_MARK_DLG_FROM_DOC_RB 5a Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document.
16 HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_OK 36 Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Ffrombibliography 33 Inserts a reference from the bibliography database.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fentrylb 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
1d .uno%3AInsertAuthoritiesEntry 21 Inserts a bibliography reference.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 7d Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame.
12 .uno%3AInsertFrame 5f Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects.
32 SW%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ABT_AUTOFORMAT 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fbordercb 21 Adds a border to the table cells.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fdontsplitcb 34 Prevents the table from spanning more than one page.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frepeatheaderspin 3f Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frepeatcb 65 Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fcolspin 37 Enter the number of columns that you want in the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fnameedit 1b Enter a name for the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fheadercb 24 Includes a heading row in the table.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frowspin 34 Enter the number of rows that you want in the table.
12 .uno%3AInsertTable a8 Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Fdefine 68 Replaces the current data source with the data source that you selected in the Available Databases list.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Fbrowse 77 Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Favailablelb 38 Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Finuselb 2e Lists the databases that are currently in use.
1a .uno%3AChangeDatabaseField 31 Change the data sources for the current document.
10 .uno%3AInsertDoc 5a Inserts the contents of another document into the current document at the cursor position.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fbrowse 47 Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Furlentry ab Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the Browse button, locate the file, and then click Insert.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fscripttype 31 Enter the type of script that you want to insert.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fnext 1d Inserts a row into the table.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fprevious 1d Inserts a row into the table.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Ftext 2e Enter the script code that you want to insert.
13 .uno%3AInsertScript 4c Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageHeader 92 Adds or removes a header from the page style that you select in the submenu. The header is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageFooter 92 Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckKeepPara 6a Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinOrphan 8a Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FTextFlowPage 2b Specify hyphenation and pagination options.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckAuto 43 Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckSplitPara 51 Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinLineBegin 66 Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcomboBreakPosition 2a Select where you want to insert the break.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinWidow 98 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinLineEnd 63 Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinMaxNum 45 Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinPageNumber 8b Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current page numbering, select "0".
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcomboBreakType 2e Select the break type that you want to insert.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckInsert 4b Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcomboPageStyle 46 Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckPageStyle 6e Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FcomboBOX_TEMPLATE 44 Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FspinFLD_LINES 6d Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FspinFLD_DROPCAPS 37 Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FcheckCB_WORD 80 Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FentryEDT_TEXT 63 Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FcheckCB_SWITCH 38 Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FspinFLD_DISTANCE 63 Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FDropCapPage a6 Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. You can also format the first word of the paragraph with large type.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FcheckCB_RESTART_PARACOUNT 56 Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FspinNF_NEW_START 3a Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
3f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FcheckCB_NUMBER_NEW_START 5a Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FcheckCB_NEW_START 30 Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FspinNF_RESTART_PARA 37 Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2Feditnumstyle 34 Edit the properties of the selected numbering style.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FcomboLB_NUMBER_STYLE 43 Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FcomboLB_OUTLINE_LEVEL 54 Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FcheckCB_COUNT_PARA 35 Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumparapage%2FNumParaPage a7 Adds or removes outline level, numbering, or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list.
11 .uno%3APageDialog 8e Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fapplytolb 3c Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Flineposlb 81 Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2FColumnPage 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fcolsnf 49 Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fback 30 Moves the column display one column to the left.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fbalance 35 Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fnext 31 Moves the column display one column to the right.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fspacing2mf 45 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fwidth3mf 1e Enter the width of the column.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Flineheightmf 58 Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fautowidth 1f Creates columns of equal width.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Flinestylelb 6e Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None".
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fspacingtocontents 66 Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2FFootnoteAreaPage 7a Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fmaxheightpage 5b Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fstyle 67 Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None".
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fmaxheight 57 Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Enable this option, then enter the height.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fposition 61 Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fspacetotext 72 Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fthickness 2b Select the thickness of the separator line.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fcolor 27 Select the color of the separator line.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Fmaxheightsb 2f Enter the maximum height for the footnote area.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnoteareapage%2Flength 4e Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendsuffix 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number.
3f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendntnumfmt 31 Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendoffset 35 Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote.
4c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2FFootnotesEndnotesTabPage 58 Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnprefix 48 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnntattextend aa Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnntnum 3f Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendprefix 46 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendntattextend 28 Adds endnotes at the end of the section.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnoffset 36 Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote.
3f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnntnumfmt 32 Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes.
41 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnnumviewbox 2d Select the numbering style for the footnotes.
41 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendnumviewbox 2c Select the numbering style for the endnotes.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnsuffix 42 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendntnum 3e Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FlistLB_COLOR 3a Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FcheckCB_RUBYBELOW 39 Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinMF_RUBYSIZE 26 Enter the font size for the Ruby text.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinNF_CHARSPERLINE 3f Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinNF_LINESPERPAGE 3a Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinMF_TEXTSIZE 54 Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FradioRB_CHARSGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FTextGridPage a5 Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.
14 .uno%3AGraphicDialog 47 Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected image.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fbyvert 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fvertpos 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fbyhori 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fhoripos 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Faschar 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ftochar 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ftopara 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ftopage 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ffollowtextflow b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2FFrameTypePage 4e Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fhorianchor 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Frelwidthrelation 6b Decides what 100% width means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins).
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fvertanchor 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fheight 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Frelheight 61 Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Forigsize 47 Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fmirror 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Frelheightrelation 6c Decides what 100% height means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins).
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fratio 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fwidth 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Frelwidth 5f Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fautoheight a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fbottom 5b Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fright 5a Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text.
27 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Ftop 58 Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Foutside 60 Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape.
1d .uno%3AWrapThroughTransparent 72 Moves the selected object to the background. This options is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
10 .uno%3AWrapIdeal ce Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fnone 96 Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fbefore 43 Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fafter 44 Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fleft 59 Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text.
f .uno%3ATextWrap 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fparallel 3f Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
12 .uno%3AWrapContour 71 Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
15 .uno%3AWrapAnchorOnly 3e Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fthrough 27 Places the object in front of the text.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_PIPETTE c1 Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_REDO 2d Reverses the action of the last Undo command.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_AUTOCONTOUR 42 Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit.
2b svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_POLYDELETE 67 Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete.
2b svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_POLYINSERT 79 Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline.
36 SVX%3AMETRICFIELD%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR%3AMTF_TOLERANCE 8f Enter the color tolerance for the eyedropper as a percentage. To increase the color range that the eyedropper selects, enter a high percentage.
14 .uno%3AContourDialog 81 Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_POLYEDIT 5f Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour.
26 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2Fcontainer 22 Displays a preview of the contour.
26 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_APPLY 2b Applies the contour to the selected object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_SELECT 3e Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_WORKPLACE 4b Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_RECT 73 Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_UNDO 19 Reverses the last action.
27 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_CIRCLE 3b Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_POLY 184 Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffloatingcontour%2FTBI_POLYMOVE 4c Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fentry 8c Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the Browse button and then locate the file that you want to link to.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Frightpages 38 Flips the selected image horizontally only on odd pages.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fallpages 33 Flips the selected image horizontally on all pages.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fhori 26 Flips the selected image horizontally.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fbrowse 4a Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fleftpages 39 Flips the selected image horizontally only on even pages.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fvert 24 Flips the selected image vertically.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2FPicturePage 3d Specify the flip and the link options for the selected image.
3b SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SFX_SMALLTP_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 35 Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry.
3b SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SFX_SMALLTP_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 2b Assigns the selected to the selected event.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feventassignpage%2Flibraries 3f Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs.
2c cui%2Fui%2Feventassignpage%2FEventAssignPage 72 Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fframe 47 Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fname 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fclient 3c Uses the image map that you created for the selected object.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fsearch 49 Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Furl 87 Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open, for example, http://www.sun.com, or file:///c|/Office/Document/Internet.sdw.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fserver 1d Uses a server-side image map.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2FFrameURLPage 56 Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fvertalign fe Specifies the vertical alignment of the frame's content. Mainly it means text content, but it also affects tables and other objects anchored to the text area (anchored as character, to character or to paragraph), for example frames, graphics or drawings.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Ftextflow a3 Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2FFrameAddPage 3f Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fname 23 Enter a name for the selected item.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprotectframe 40 Locks the position of the selected item in the current document.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprev f8 Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame must be empty.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fnext df Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Faltname 91 Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assist people with disabilities.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprotectcontent 36 Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprotectsize 24 Locks the size of the selected item.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Feditinreadonly 5d Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected).
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprintframe 37 Includes the selected item when you print the document.
12 .uno%3AFrameDialog 6a Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name.
12 .uno%3ATableDialog 7d Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fleftmf 68 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ffromleft 63 Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fbelowmf 73 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fname 69 Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Frelwidth 42 Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fabovemf 70 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2FFormatTablePage 52 Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fcenter 2b Centers the table horizontally on the page.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ffull 49 Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Frightmf 69 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fwidthmf 1d Enter the width of the table.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fright 3c Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fleft 3a Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ffree 71 Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fnext 44 Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fback 43 Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fwidth6 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fspace-nospin 8a Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fadaptcolumns 42 If possible, change in column width will be equal for each column.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fadaptwidth 3c Reduces or increases table width with modified column width.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fsplitrow 3e Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fkeep 4f Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fbreak 63 Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fheadline 50 Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fbefore 30 Inserts a page or column break before the table.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fvertorient 3f Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpage 2f Inserts a page break before or after the table.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fafter 2f Inserts a page or column break after the table.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2FTableTextFlowPage 42 Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpagestyle 56 Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpagestylelb 56 Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Ftextdirection 31 Select the orientation for the text in the cells.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fcolumn 48 Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fsplit 40 Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Frepeatheadernf 33 Enter the number of rows to include in the heading.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpagenonf 40 Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break.
e .uno%3AProtect 40 Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified.
19 .uno%3AUnsetCellsReadOnly 46 Removes the cell protection for all of the cells in the current table.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frowheight%2Ffit 48 Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frowheight%2Fheightmf 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s).
13 .uno%3ASetRowHeight 2a Changes the height of the selected row(s).
1a .uno%3ASetOptimalRowHeight 45 Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells.
10 .uno%3AEntireRow 29 Selects the row that contains the cursor.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 2b Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2Fwidth 39 Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2Fcolumn 46 Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of.
15 .uno%3ASetColumnWidth 2c Changes the width of the selected column(s).
1c .uno%3ASetOptimalColumnWidth 47 Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells.
13 .uno%3AEntireColumn 2c Selects the column that contains the cursor.
31 SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_INS_ROW_COL%3ACB_POS_AFTER 5c Adds new columns to the right of the current column, or adds new rows below the current row.
32 SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_INS_ROW_COL%3ACB_POS_BEFORE 5b Adds new columns to the left of the current column, or adds new rows above the current row.
2e SW%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_INS_ROW_COL%3AED_COUNT 32 Enter the number of columns or rows that you want.
22 SW%3AMODALDIALOG%3ADLG_INS_ROW_COL 27 Inserts a row or column into the table.
19 .uno%3AInsertColumnDialog 20 Inserts a column into the table.
16 .uno%3AInsertRowDialog 1d Inserts a row into the table.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 2e Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
2b SFX2%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_STYLECATALOG%3ABT_TOOL 38 These are the different categories of formatting styles.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fapply 4a Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fstyles 5f A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Flinks c7 Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fremove 48 Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fcondstyle 3c Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 59 Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection.
10 .uno%3AListStyle 3b Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists.
10 .uno%3APageStyle 25 Displays formatting styles for pages.
1c HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE a5 The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window.
10 .uno%3ACharStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for characters.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for paragraphs.
11 .uno%3AFrameStyle 26 Displays formatting styles for frames.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 75 Choose Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu of a paragraph to edit the style of all paragraphs of the same style.
15 HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN a0 Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 91 Use the Styles and Formatting deck of the Sidebar to apply, create, edit, and remove formatting styles. Double-click an entry to apply the style.
17 .uno%3AOnlineAutoFormat 8d Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect, and then click the Options tab.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fpatterncb 37 Includes background styles in the selected table style.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Frename 5b Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fbordercb 33 Includes border styles in the selected table style.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Ffontcb 35 Includes font formatting in the selected table style.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fnumformatcb 37 Includes numbering formats in the selected table style.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fremove 21 Deletes the selected table style.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fadd 23 Adds a new table style to the list.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Falignmentcb 38 Includes alignment settings in the selected table style.
2c SW%3ALISTBOX%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ALB_FORMAT 6d Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK.
11 HID_AUTOFMT_TABLE 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpercentdialog%2FPercentDialog ba Внесете ја најмалата должина за спојување на едноредни пасуси, во проценти на широчина на страницата.
16 .uno%3AAutoFormatApply be Автоматски ја форматира датотеката според опциите кои сте ги поставиле во Алатки - Автоматски корекции.
17 HID_AUTOFORMAT_EDIT_CHG 161 Отвора дијалог во кој можете да ги прифатите или да ги отфрлите АвтоФормат промените. Тука исто така можете да ги проследите и промените сторени од одреден автор на документот на одреден датум.
15 HID_AUTOFORMAT_REJECT 49 Ги отфрла сите промени во форматирањето
15 HID_AUTOFORMAT_ACCEPT 5e Ги става во функција сите промени во форматирањето.
1d .uno%3AAutoFormatRedlineApply 164 Автоматски ја форматира датотеката според опциите кои сте ги поставиле во Алатки - Автоматска корекција . Се појавува дијалог каде треба да одговорите дали ги прифаќате или ги офрлате промените.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Foverwrite af Ги заменува стиловите во тековниот документ кои имаат исто име како стиловите кои ги вчитувате.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Fnumbering 93 Ги вчитува стиловите за нумерација од избраниот документ во тековниот документ.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Fpages 93 Ги вчитува стиловите за нумерација од избраниот документ во тековниот документ.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Ftext 8d Ги вчитува стиловите на знаците од избраниот документ во тековниот документ.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Fframe 8d Ги вчитува стиловите за рамките од избраниот документ во тековниот документ.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Ftemplates 84 Ги набројува шаблоните кои се на располагање во соодветната категорија.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Fcategories f4 Ги набројува категориите шаблони кои се на располагање. Кликнете врз одредена категорија за да видите што содржи, во списокотШаблони
28 sfx%2Fui%2Floadtemplatedialog%2Ffromfile b5 Лоцирајте ја датотеката која ги содржи стиловите кои сакате да ги вчитате, а потоа кликнете Отвори.
11 .uno%3ALoadStyles 96 увезува стилови за форматирање од друг документ или шаблон во тековниот документ.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fnoheading 30 Splits the table without copying the header row.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcustomheading 34 Inserts an additional blank row in the second table.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcustomheadingapplystyle 77 Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcopyheading 52 Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table.
11 .uno%3ASplitTable 93 Ја дели тековната табела на две посебни табели на местото каде се наоѓа курсорот
11 .uno%3AMergeTable 135 Спојува две последователни табели во единствена табела.  Табелите мора да бидат поставени директно една до друга и не смејат да бидат разделени со празен пасус меѓу нив.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fdelete 3e Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fcontinue 48 Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fright 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
d HID_HYPHENATE 3d Вметнува цртичка на таа позиција.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fworded 3d Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word.
10 .uno%3AHyphenate 99 Вметнува хифенација кај зборови кои се предолги да застанат на крајот на алинејата.
13 FN_WORDCOUNT_DIALOG ae Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document. The count is kept up to date as you type or change the selection.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumberingnamedialog%2Fform 11e Кликнете на стилот на нумерирање во списокот, а потоа именувајте го стилот.  Бројките соодветствуваат на  нивото на контура на која  стиловите се однесуваат.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumbering%2Fform1 d0 Изберете го претходно дефинираниот стил на нумерирање кој сакате да му го назначите на избраното ниво на контура.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumbering%2Fsaveas 123 Отвора дијалог каде можете да ги снимите постојните поставувања за избраното ниво на контура. Потоа можете да ги вчитате вкавите поставувања од друг документ.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumbering%2Fuser 111 Зачувува или вчитива форматирање на нумерација на контура. Зачуваното форматирање на контурата на текстот е достапно кај сите текстуални документи.
1d .uno%3AChapterNumberingDialog af Го одредува форматот на броење и хиерархијата на нумерирање на Поглавја, во тековниот документ.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fstartat 7e Внесете го бројот каде да почне повторно нумерацијата на Поглавјата.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fsublevelsnf 13d Изберете го бројот на ниво на нивоа на контури кои ќе бидат вклучени кво нумерирањето на Поглавјата. На пр. изберете "3" за да се прикажат 3 нивоа на нумерирање на Поглавија: 1.1.1
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fcharstyle 53 Изберете го форматот на знакот за нумерација.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fnumbering a7 Изберете го стилот на нумерирање кој сакате да го искористите за избраното ниво на контура.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fstyle a4 Изберете го стилот на пасусот кој сакате да му го одредите на нивото на избраната контура.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fsuffix 7c Внесете го текстот кој сакате да се прикаже по бројот на Поглавието.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fprefix 80 Внесете го текстот кој сакате да се прикаже пред бројот на Поглавието.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Flevel c9 Кликнете на нивото на контура кое сакате да го измените, а потоа одредете ги опциите за нумерација за тоа ниво.
15 .uno%3AFootnoteDialog 73 Ги одредува опциите за прикажување на фуснотите и забелешките.
2c SW%3AEDIT%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_CONT_FROM 163 Внесете го текстот кој сакате да биде прикажан на страницата каде се дава продолжението на забелешките, на пр.  "Продолжение од ". $[officename] Writer автоматски го внесува бројот од претходната страница.
27 SW%3AEDIT%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_CONT 176 Внесете го текстот кој сакате да ви се прикажува кога фуснотите се даваат во продолжение на следната страница, на пр. "Продолжение на стр. ". $[officename] Writer автоматски ја вметнува бројката на следната страница.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcharanchorstylelb 67 Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2FFootnotePage 34 Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcharstylelb 5e Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fpospagecb 2d Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page.
29 SW%3AEDIT%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_SUFFIX b5 Внесете го текстот кој сакате да биде прикажан по бројката на фуснотата, во текстот на забелешката.
29 SW%3AEDIT%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_PREFIX b9 Внесете го текстот кој сакате да биде прикажан пред бројката на фуснотата, во текстот на забелешката.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcountinglb 2e Select the numbering option for the footnotes.
32 SW%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AFLD_OFFSET f1 Внесете го бројот на првата фуснота во документот. Оваа опција е возможна само ако сте одбрале "По документ" во полето Пребројување .
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fposdoccb 3a Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fnumberinglb 4a Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fparastylelb 31 Select the paragraph style for the footnote text.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fpagestylelb 39 Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fcharstylelb 5c Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fpagestylelb 38 Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes.
28 SW%3AEDIT%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AED_SUFFIX cb Внесете го текстот кој сакате да биде прикажан по бројот на крајната забелешка, во текстот на самата забелешка.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fcharanchorstylelb 66 Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document.
28 SW%3AEDIT%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AED_PREFIX b9 Внесете го текстот кој сакате да биде прикажан пред бројот на забелешката, во текстот на забелешката.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fparastylelb 30 Select the paragraph style for the endnote text.
31 SW%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AFLD_OFFSET 60 Внесете го бројот на првата забелешка во документот.
13 HID_ENDNOTE_OPTIONS 43 Го одредува форматот на забелешките.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fbordercb 2f Adds a border to the table and the table cells.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fdontsplitcb 27 Does not divide the table across pages.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Frepeatheaderssb 4e Ги повторува првите n редови како заглавие.
17 .uno%3AConvertTableText 49 Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fother 5d Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fkeepcolumn 50 Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Ftabs 3a Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fheadingcb 34 Formats the first row of the new table as a heading.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fparagraph 40 Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fsemicolons 45 Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fothered 3b Type the character that you want to use as a column marker.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Frepeatheading 3b Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fautofmt 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
1f SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_SORTING_CB_CASE fc Прави разлика меѓу големи и мали букви кога сакате да ги подредите податоците во одредена табела. За азиските јазици, важат посебни опции.
1e SW_LISTBOX_DLG_SORTING_LB_LANG 95 Изберете го јазикот со кој се дефинираат правилата за подредување по азбучен ред.
11 .uno%3ASortDialog a2 Ги подредува избраните пасуси или редови од табели, по азбучен ред или според реден број.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fkey3 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
22 SW_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_SORTING_PB_DELIM c8 Го отвара полето Специјални знаци, каде можете да изберете знаци кои сакате да ги употребите како разделници.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolsb3 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolumns 45 Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftypelb3 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fup3 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
27 SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_TAB bd Ако избраните пасуси соодветствуваат со одреден список одделен со табулатори, одберете ја оваа опција.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdown3 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
27 SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_ROW b2 Ги подредува редовите или избраните пасуси во  табелата според поставените опции за подредување.
22 SW%3AEDIT%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_TABCH 8e Впишете го знакот кој сакате да ги употребите како разделник избраниот текст.
13 .uno%3ACalculateSel 8e Ја пресметува избраната формула и го копира резултатот во таблата со исечоци.
11 .uno%3ARepaginate f9 Ги ажурира форматите на страниците во документот и повторно го пресметува вкупниот број на страници кој е прикажан во Статусната лента.
14 .uno%3ARemoveTableOf 46 Го брише постојниот индекс или табела.
13 .uno%3AEditCurIndex 4a Го уредува постојниот индекс или табела.
15 .uno%3AUpdateCurIndex 36 Го ажурира постојниот индекс.
17 .uno%3AUpdateAllIndexes 12b Ажурирај ги сите индекси на Содржината на постојниот документ. Нема потреба да го поставите курсорот во одреден индекс или табела пред да ја повикате оваа наредба.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Frestarteverynewpage 40 Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fstyledropdown 46 Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fintervalspin 31 Enter the counting interval for the line numbers.
36 SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_COUNT_FRAMELINES 18c Додава бројка на секоја алинеја на текст во текстуална рамка. Нумерацијата почнува од почеток во секоја текстуална рамка, а истата не е вклучена во пребројувањето на алинеите во главниот дел од текстот во документот.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fformatdropdown 30 Select the numbering style that you want to use.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fshownumbering 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Flinesspin 3a Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fpositiondropdown 31 Select where you want the line numbers to appear.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fspacingspin 57 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Ftextentry 33 Enter the text that you want to use as a separator.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fblanklines 2c Includes empty paragraphs in the line count.
10 .uno%3AUpdateAll a9 Ги ажурира сите врски, полиња, индекси, Содржина, како и форматирањето на тековниот документ.
13 .uno%3AUpdateFields 6d Ја ажурира содржината во сите полиња на тековниот документ.
15 .uno%3AUpdateAllLinks 4c Ги ажурира врските до тековниот документ.
13 .uno%3AUpdateCharts 54 Ги ажурира графиконите во тековниот документ.
16 .uno%3ADrawGraphicMenu 3e Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object.
16 .uno%3AMailMergeWizard d1 Го подига Волшебник за циркуларни писма за создавање форми на писма или за испраќање е-пораки до повеќе приматели.
12 .uno%3AMergeDialog d1 Го подига Волшебник за циркуларни писма за создавање форми на писма или за испраќање е-пораки до повеќе приматели.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Frecentdoclb 2b Изберете го документот.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Frecentdoc 91 Користи постоечки документ како основа на новиот документ со циркуларно писмо.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fbrowsetemplate 29 Opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Floaddoc 8d Изберете постоечки Writer документ кој ќе го искористите во циркуларното писмо.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fnewdoc 77 Создава нов Writer документ кој ќе се користи како циркуларно писмо.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Ftemplate 91 Изберете ја формата на шаблонот кој ќе го користите во вашето циркуларно писмо.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fcurrentdoc 87 Го искористува тековниот Wiriter документ како основа за циркуларното писмо.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fbrowsedoc 45 Locate the Writer document that you want to use, and then click Open.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2FMMSelectPage 87 Го искористува тековниот Wiriter документ како основа за циркуларното писмо.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputtypepage%2Femail 5c Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputtypepage%2Fletter 6c Создава документ со циркуларно писмо кој може да се печати.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputtypepage%2FMMOutputTypePage 6c Создава документ со циркуларно писмо кој може да се печати.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2Fnext d0 Користете ги копчињата за прелистување за да ги видите информациите од претходниот или следниот податочен запис.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2Fassign 4f Го отвора дијалогот за Совпаѓање на полиња.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2Fprev d0 Користете ги копчињата за прелистување за да ги видите информациите од претходниот или следниот податочен запис.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2Fhideempty 2f Enable to leave empty lines out of the address.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2Faddresslist 11d Го отвора дијалогот Избери список адреси каде можете да го изберете извор на податоци за адресите, да додавате нови адреси или да внесете нов список адреси.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2Fsettings 48 Го отвора дијалогот Избери блок адреси.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2Faddress 4c Додава блок адреси во циркуларното писмо.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmaddressblockpage%2FMMAddressBlockPage 11d Го отвора дијалогот Избери список адреси каде можете да го изберете извор на податоци за адресите, да додавате нови адреси или да внесете нов список адреси.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmsalutationpage%2Fnext d0 Користете ги копчињата за прелистување за да ги видите информациите од претходниот или следниот податочен запис.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmsalutationpage%2Fprev d0 Користете ги копчињата за прелистување за да ги видите информациите од претходниот или следниот податочен запис.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmsalutationpage%2Fassign 4f Го отвора дијалогот за Совпаѓање на полиња.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmsalutationpage%2Fgreeting 1c Додава поздрав.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmlayoutpage%2Fdown 3a Го преместува поздравот надолу.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmlayoutpage%2Fup 3a Го преместува поздравот нагоре.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmlayoutpage%2Ftop b5 Внесете колку место да биде оставено меѓу горниот раб на страницата и горниот раб на блокот адреси.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmlayoutpage%2Fleft b1 Внесете колку место да биде оставено меѓу левиот раб на страницата и левиот раб на блокот адреси.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmlayoutpage%2Fzoom 2d Select a magnification for the print preview.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmlayoutpage%2Falign 97 Ја израмнува рамката која го содржи блокот адреси со левата маргина на страницата.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2Fexclude 70 Го иззема тековниот примател од постојното циркуларно писмо.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2Flast 7f Употребете ги копчињата за прелистување за да се движите по адресите.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2Fnext 7f Употребете ги копчињата за прелистување за да се движите по адресите.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2Fprev 7f Употребете ги копчињата за прелистување за да се движите по адресите.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2Ffirst 7f Употребете ги копчињата за прелистување за да се движите по адресите.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2Fedit dc Го минимизира волшебникот, при што можете да го изменувате споениот документот со циркуларното писмо за сите приматели.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2Frecord-nospin ec Внесете го бројот на адресниот запис за одреден примател за да ви се појави краток преглед на циркуларното писмо за тој примател.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmpreparepage%2FMMPreparePage ec Внесете го бројот на адресниот запис за одреден примател за да ви се појави краток преглед на циркуларното писмо за тој примател.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmergepage%2Fmatchcase 65 Прави разлика меѓу мали и големи букви при пребарување.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmergepage%2Fwholewords 66 Пребарува цели зборови, а не делови од поголеми зборови.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmergepage%2Ffind 4e Кликнете за да започнете со пребарувањето.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmergepage%2Fentry a1 Внесете го текстот кој сакате да го најдете во споениот документ, на пр., име на примател.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmergepage%2Fbackwards 81 Пребарува од позицијата каде се наоѓа курсорот до врвот на документот.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmergepage%2Fedit ae Го минимизира волшебникот така што можете да го уредувате циркуларното писмо за еден примател.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmergepage%2FMMMergePage ae Го минимизира волшебникот така што можете да го уредувате циркуларното писмо за еден примател.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsendallrb 65 Избери го ова за да испратиш е-пораки до сите приматели.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fto-nospin 8f Внеси го бројот на последниот запис кој ќе биде вклучен во циркуларното писмо.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2FMMOutputPage 8c Го зачувува почетниот документ кој ги содржи полињата од базата на податоци.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Ffrom-nospin 87 Внеси го бројот на првиот запис кој ќе биде вклучен во циркуларното писмо.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsavenow 2d Ги зачувува документите.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsinglerb 57 Го зачувува споениот документ во една датотека.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Ffromrb da Избира цела низа записи кои започнуваат од бројот на запис на полето Од, а завршуваат на со бројот на запис на полето До.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsendmerged 6c Го испраќа резултатот до сите приматели, во вид на е-пораки.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsavemerged 3a Ги зачувува споените документи.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsavestartingdoc 3c Го зачувува постојниот документ.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsavestarting 8c Го зачувува почетниот документ кој ги содржи полињата од базата на податоци.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fprintallrb 4a Ги печати документите за сите приматели.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Findividualrb 17d Ги зачувува споените документи во посебна датотека за секој примател. Имињата на датотеките се образуваат така што во нив се содржи името кое сте го внеле, проследено со долна црта и бројот на тековниот запис.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fprinters 1c Избери печатач.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fprintmerged 71 Го печати резултатот од сите или само од некои од примателите.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsendnow 44 Кликни за да почнеш да праќаш е-пошта.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsendassettings f5 Го отвора дијалогот за Е-пораки каде можете да ја испишете е-пораката за приложени датотеките, кои се испраќаат како Циркуларно писмо.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fprintersettings 39 Ги менува опциите во печатачот.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fprintnow 52 Ги печати документите од циркуларното писмо.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fmailto 8c Изберете го полето од базата кое ја содржи адресата за е-пошта на примателот.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fcopyto 175 Го отвора дијалогот Копија и до каде можете да венсете една или повеќе адреси на кои исто така сакате да испратите копија од пораката, при што адресата на ипраќачот или ќе биде видлива (CC) или невидлива (BCC).
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsubject 37 Внесете Предмет на е-пораката.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fsendas 68 Изберете го форматот во кој е-пораката ќе биде испратена.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputpage%2Fattach 68 Го прикажува името на датотеката во прилог на е-пораката.
27 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fccdialog%2Fbcc ac Внесете ги скриените адреси (BlindCarbonCopy) на примателите на е-пораки, одделени со точка-запирка (;).
26 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fccdialog%2Fcc d0 >Внесете ги адресите на примателите кои треба да добијат копија од е-пораката (CarbonCopy), одделени со точка-запирка (;).
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fccdialog%2FCCDialog d0 >Внесете ги адресите на примателите кои треба да добијат копија од е-пораката (CarbonCopy), одделени со точка-запирка (;).
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fdown 94 Изберете елемент од списокот и кликнете на една од стрелките за да го преместите.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fright 94 Изберете елемент од списокот и кликнете на една од стрелките за да го преместите.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fleft 94 Изберете елемент од списокот и кликнете на една од стрелките за да го преместите.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fup 94 Изберете елемент од списокот и кликнете на една од стрелките за да го преместите.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fcustom a7 Одбери вредност од списокот за полето за отпоздравување и полето за интерпункцискиот знак.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Ffromaddr 57 Го отстранува избраното поле од другиот список.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Ftoaddr e4 Го додава избраното поле од списокот елементи за отпоздравување во другиот список. Можете да додадете едно поле повеќе пати.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Faddressdest ad Поставете ги полињата со користење на влечи-пушти со глушецот или со стрелките на тастатурата.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Faddresses 57 Изберете поле и влечете го се до другиот список.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2FAddressBlockDialog 57 Изберете поле и влечете го се до другиот список.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmailbody%2Fbodymle 45 Внеси го главниот текст на е-пораката.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmailbody%2Fgreeting 31 Додава поздрав во е-порака.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmmailbody%2FMailBodyDialog 31 Додава поздрав во е-порака.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fassignfieldsdialog%2FAssignFieldsDialog 74 Изберете име на поле во базата за секој логички елемент на поле.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcreateaddresslist%2FCreateAddressList c0 Внесете нова или менувајте ја постојната содржина на секое од полињата за приматели на циркуларни писма.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fedit b1 Го отвара дијалоготНов блок адреси каде можете да го менувате изгледот на избраниот блок адреси.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fnew a5 Го отвора дијалогот Нов блок адреси каде можете да дефинирате нов изглед на блокот адреси.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fcountry 70 Внесете запис за земјата/регионот кој нема да биде испечатен.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fdependent f2 Вклучува име на земјата/регионот во рамките на блокот адреси, само ако се разликува од записот кој сте го внеле во текстуалното поле.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fdelete 4f Го брише изгледот на избраните блок адреси.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Falways 71 Вклучува информации за земјата или регионот во блокот адреси.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fnever 6f Ги иззема информациите за земјата регионот од блокот адреси.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2FSelectBlockDialog b3 Изберете го блокот од списокот адреси кои сакате да ги користите за циркуларно писмо и кликнете OK.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fchangetable d5 Го отвара Избери табелаж дијалогот, каде можете да изберете и некоја друга табела за употреба во циркуларното писмо.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fedit a8 Го отвара дијалогот Нов список адреси каде можете да го изменувате избраниот список адреси.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Ffilter 139 Го отвора дијалогот Стандарден филтер каде можете да поставите филтри за списокот адреси, при што ќе се прикажуваат само оние приматели кои вие сте ги избрале со филтрите.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fcreate 95 Го отвора дијалогот Нов список адреси каде можете да создадете нов список адреси.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fadd bc Изберете ја базата на податоци која ги содржи адрезите кои сакате да ги користите за ваш список адреси.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2FSelectAddressDialog bc Изберете ја базата на податоци која ги содржи адрезите кои сакате да ги користите за ваш список адреси.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselecttabledialog%2Fpreview 56 Го отвора полето Приматели на циркуларно писмо
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselecttabledialog%2Ftable 9c Изберете ја табелата која сакате да ја користите за  адреси на циркуларно писмо addresses.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselecttabledialog%2FSelectTableDialog 9c Изберете ја табелата која сакате да ја користите за  адреси на циркуларно писмо addresses.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftitlepage%2FDLG_TITLEPAGE 24 Insert title pages in your document.
16 .uno%3ATitlePageDialog 24 Insert title pages in your document.
17 .uno%3ADefaultNumbering 63 Додава или отстранува нумерирање од избраните пасуси.
12 .uno%3AChainFrames 55 Ја поврзува избраната рамка со следната рамка.
13 .uno%3AUnhainFrames 42 Ја раскинува врската меѓу две рамки.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows 189 Вметнува една или повеќе редови во табела, под изборот. Можете да вметнете повеќе од еден ред со отворање на дијалогот (избериТабела - Вметни - Редови), или со избирање на повеќе од еден ред пред да кликнете на иконата.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns 65 Вметнува една или повеќе колони во табелата,по изборот.
13 .uno%3ATableModeFix be Ако е вклучен овој режим, промените во линија и/или колона ќе влијаат само на соседните линии или колони.
17 .uno%3ATableModeFixProp a4 Ако е активиран овој режим, промените во линијата и/или колоната влијаат на целата табела.
18 .uno%3ATableModeVariable a9 Ако овој режим е активен, промените на линија и/или колона влијаат на големината на табелата.
e .uno%3AAutoSum d4 Ја активира функцијата сума. Забележи дека покажувачот мора да биде во ќелијата каде што сакате да се појави сумата.
14 .uno%3ARemoveBullets 84 Исклучува нумерирање или точки во тековниот пасус или избраните пасуси.
19 .uno%3ADecrementSubLevels 58 Поместува пасус со потточки надолу за едно ниво.
19 .uno%3AIncrementSubLevels 68 Поместува пасус со потточки едно нумерирано ниво нагоре.
1d .uno%3AInsertNeutralParagraph 8a Вметнува пасус без нумерирање. Тоа нема да влијае на постојното нумерирање.
15 .uno%3AMoveUpSubItems 5d Поместува пасус со потточки над претходниот пасус.
17 .uno%3AMoveDownSubItems 6d Поместува пасус со сите негови потточки под следниот пасус.
15 .uno%3ANumberingStart 43 Го рестартира нумерирањето на текст.
16 .uno%3AStatePageNumber 28e Тековниот број на страницата е прикажан во ова поле од статусната лента. Со двојно притискање на копчето се отвара Навигаторот,со кој можете да се движите низ документот. Со притискање на десното копче од глушецот се прикажуваат сите обележувачи во документот. Кликнете на обележувачот за да го поставите покажувачот на текст на локацијата на обележувачот.
14 .uno%3AStatusBarFunc 60 Прикажува тековни информации за активниот документ.
f .uno%3AZoomPlus 5e Зголеми за да добиеш поблизок приказ на документот.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 72 Намали за да видете повеќе од документот во намалена големина.
11 HID_PVIEW_ZOOM_LB 2f Determines the zoom level of the print preview.
13 .uno%3AShowTwoPages 2f Displays two pages in the Print Preview window.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpreviewzoomdialog%2Fcols 5e Го одредува бројот на страници.прикажани во колони.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpreviewzoomdialog%2Frows 4b Го одредува бројот на редови на страници.
12 .uno%3APreviewZoom 151 Го одредува бројот на страници прикажани на екранот. Кликнете на стрелката веднаш до иконата за да отворете мрежа и изберете број на страници прикажани во редови и колони во прегледот.
10 FN_SHOW_BOOKVIEW 48 Select to display the first page on the right side in the print preview.
3c SW%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3APB_STANDARD 151 Одредува дека системот нема да користи фиксен број на редови и колони при печатење на приказот на страницата, но претпочита употреба на оригинално прикажаното во приказот на страница.
3a SW%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_ROWS a2 Го одредува бројот на редови на страници (хоризонтално наредени страници од документот).
3d SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PORTRAIT 4d Ја печати страницата во формат на портрет.
3e SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 4b Ја печати страницата во формат на пејзаж.
3a SW%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_COLS b1 Го одредува бројот на страници прикажани во колони (вертикално наредени страници од документот).
3c SW%3AMETRICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_LMARGIN 48 Ја одредува ширината на левата маргина.
3c SW%3AMETRICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_BMARGIN 4f Ја одредува ширината на маргината на дното.
3c SW%3AMETRICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_TMARGIN 4a Ја одредува висината на горната маргина.
3c SW%3AMETRICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_VMARGIN 7f Го одредува вертикалното растојание помеѓу страниците на документот
1a .uno%3APreviewPrintOptions ab Отвора дијалог каде поставувањата за отпечатокот од вашиот документ може да бидат направени.
3c SW%3AMETRICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_RMARGIN 4a Ја одредува ширината на десната маргина.
3c SW%3AMETRICFIELD%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_HMARGIN 83 Го одредува хоризонталното растојание помеѓу страниците на документот
f HID_MN_CALC_COS 43 Го пресметува косинусот во радијани.
e HID_MN_CALC_EQ 56 Проверува дали избраните вредности се еднакви.
f HID_MN_CALC_POW 44 Го пресметува степенот на даден број.
f HID_MN_POP_FUNC 63 Може да изберете од следниве тригонометриски функции:
f HID_MN_CALC_LES 5a Тестови за вредности помали од одредена вредност
10 HID_MN_CALC_SQRT 3c Го пресметува квадратниот корен.
10 HID_MN_CALC_ATAN 50 Ја пресметува аркус тангентата во радијани.
11 HID_MN_CALC_ROUND 5f Го заокружува бројот на одредените децимални места.
f HID_MN_CALC_NEQ 5e Тестови за нееднаквост помеѓу избраните вредности.
f HID_MN_CALC_SUM 4a Ја пресметува сумата од избраните ќелии.
f HID_MN_CALC_AND 5d Тестови за вредности што одговараат на Логичкото И
10 HID_MN_CALC_ASIN 4a Го пресметува аркус синусот во радијани.
f HID_MN_CALC_SIN 3e Го пресметува синусот во радијани
f FN_FORMULA_CALC 83 Отвора подмени, од кое може да вметнете формула во ќелијата на табелата.
f HID_MN_CALC_LEQ 7a Тестови за вредности помали од или еднакви на одредената вредност.
f HID_MN_CALC_TAN 45 Ја пресметува тангентата во радијани.
10 HID_MN_CALC_MEAN 87 Го пресметува аритметичкиот просек на вредности во една област или листа.
10 HID_MN_CALC_ACOS 4e Го пресметува аркус косинусот во радијани.
f HID_MN_CALC_XOR 75 Тестови за вредности што одговараат на Логичкото ексклузивно ILI
f HID_MN_CALC_GEQ 79 Тестови за вредности поголеми од или еднакви на одредена вредност
e HID_MN_CALC_OR 5e Тестови за вредности што одговараат на Логичкото ILI
e HID_MN_POP_OPS 64 Може да вметнеш различни оператори во твојата формула.
f HID_MN_CALC_GRE 5e Тестови за вредности поголеми од одредена вредност
f HID_MN_CALC_MAX 71 Ја пресметува максималната вредност во една област или листа.
13 HID_MN_CALC_LISTSEP 4a Ги разделува елементите во дадена листа.
f HID_MN_CALC_NOT 5f Тестови за вредности што одговараат на Логичкото Не
15 HID_MN_POP_STATISTICS 5b Може да изберете од следниве статистички функции:
f HID_MN_CALC_PHD 38 Ја пресметува процентуалноста
f HID_MN_CALC_MIN 6f Ја пресметува минималната вредност во една област или листа.
11 FN_FORMULA_CANCEL 82 Ги брише содржините на влезната линија и ја затвора лентата за формули.
10 FN_FORMULA_APPLY 14a Ги пренесува содржините на влезната линија во вашиот документ и ја затвора лентата за формули. Содржините на влезната линија се внесени во позицијата на покажувачот во документот.
10 HID_EDIT_FORMULA 112 Ви овозможува да креирате формула со директно пишување во влезната линија или со кликање на иконата Формула за да се прикажат формулите во подменито.
11 .uno%3AInsertCtrl a7 Алатникот содржи различни функции за вметнување рамки, графики, табели, и останати објекти.
16 .uno%3AInsertFieldCtrl cf Кликнете за да го отворите дијалогот Полиња. Кликнете на стрелката веднаш до иконата за да го отворете подменито.
15 HID_INSERT_FIELD_CTRL cf Кликнете за да го отворите дијалогот Полиња. Кликнете на стрелката веднаш до иконата за да го отворете подменито.
16 .uno%3AInsertDateField 46 Го вметнува тековниот датум како поле.
16 .uno%3AInsertTimeField 46 Го вметнува тековното време во полето.
1c .uno%3AInsertPageNumberField 42 Inserts the current page number as a field at the cursor position.
1b .uno%3AInsertPageCountField 72 Го вметнува вкупниот број на страници во документот како поле.
17 .uno%3AInsertTopicField 7f Ја вметнува темата дефинирана во својствата на документот  како поле.
17 .uno%3AInsertTitleField 80 Го вметнува насловот дефиниран во својствата на документот како поле.
18 .uno%3AInsertAuthorField 48 Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field.
e .uno%3AGraphic 7b If the Images and Charts icon on the Tools bar is activated, no graphics are displayed - only empty frames as placeholders.
13 .uno%3AShadowCursor 2b Activates or deactivates the direct cursor.
10 FN_INSERT_HEADER cf Го прикажува заглавјето на HTML-документот ако заглавијата се оневозможени во ливчето Формат - Страница - Заглавје.
10 FN_INSERT_FOOTER cd Го прикажува подножјето на HTML-документот ако подножјата се оневозможени во ливчето Формат - Страница - Подножје.
15 .uno%3AStateWordCount b2 The number of words in the document and selection is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the word count dialog, which shows extra document statistics.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 48 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text.
f .uno%3AFileMenu 5c These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 4d This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 52 This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document.
16 .uno%3AInsertPagebreak 73 Inserts a manual page break at the current cursor position and places the cursor at the beginning of the next page.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu cb The Insert menu contains commands for inserting new elements in your document. This includes images, media, charts, objects from other applications, hyperlink, comments, symbols, footnotes, and sections.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 4e Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu 9c Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 88 Содржи команди за манипулирање и прикажување на прозорците од документот.
19 .uno%3AConvertTableToText 84 Отвора дијалог каде што може да ја претворите тековната табела во текст.
19 .uno%3AConvertTextToTable 84 Отвора дијалог каде што може да го претворите избраниот текст во табела.
5 20520 bd Ги повторува заглавијата на табелата на наредните страници ако табелата се протега на повеќе страници.
5 20530 32 Ја избира тековната ќелија.
5 20515 32 Ја избира тековната табела.
5 20529 30 Ја брише тековната табела.
5 21753 55 Дозволува прелом на страница во тековниот ред.
10 .uno%3ATableMenu 5b Shows commands to insert, edit, and delete a table and its elements inside a text document.
17 .uno%3AFormatStylesMenu 5b Contains commands to set, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a text document.
16 .uno%3AParaLeftToRight 3f Текстот се внесува одлево надесно.
d .uno%3AShrink 2b Reduces the font size of the selected text.
b .uno%3AGrow 2d Increases the font size of the selected text.
16 .uno%3AParaRightToLeft 8b Текстот форматиран со изглед на комплексен текст се внесува оддесно налево.
10 HID_TEXT_TOOLBOX 72 Алатникот за форматирање содржи функции за форматирање текст.
12 HID_GRAFIK_TOOLBOX 59 The Image Bar contains functions for formatting and positioning selected bitmap graphics.
11 HID_TABLE_TOOLBOX f7 Алатникот за табели содржи функции што Ви се потребни кога работите со табели. Се појавува кога ќе го придвижите покажувачот во табела.
10 HID_DRAW_TOOLBOX 11d Алатникот за својства на нацртаниот објект што се појавува кога е избран нацртан објект содржи функции за уредување и позиционирање на нацртаните објекти.
f HID_NUM_TOOLBOX 152 Алатникот за точки и нумерирање содржи функции за менување на структурата на нумерираните пасуси, вклучувајки и промена на редоследот на пасусите и дефинирање различни нивоа на пасус.
11 .uno%3AZoomSlider 129 Повлечете го лизгачот за зум кон лево за да покажете повеќе страници, повлечете кон десно за да зумирате во страницата и да се прикаже помала област од страницата.
11 .uno%3AViewLayout 149 Иконите за распоред на приказ покажуват од лево на десно. Режим на единечна колона. Режим на приказ со страници една до друга. Режим на книга со две страници како кај отворена книга.
15 .uno%3ALanguageStatus 226 Го прикажува јазикот на избраниот текст. Кликнете за да го отворите менито каде можете да изберете друг јазик за избраниот текст или за тековниот пасус. Изберете „Ниеден“ за да го исклучите текстот од проверка на правописот и разделувањето. Изберете „Повеќе“ за да отворите дијалог со повеќе опции.
14 .uno%3AInsertFormula ad Алатникот за формули Ви овозможува да креирате и вметнувате пресметки во текстуален документ.
11 HID_FRAME_TOOLBOX d6 Кога е избрана рамка, алатникот за рамки ги овозможува најважните функции за форматирање и позиционирање на рамката.
f HID_OLE_TOOLBOX eb Алатникот за OLE-објекти се појавува кога се избрани објекти и ги содржи најважните функции за нивно форматирање и позиционирање.
15 HID_DRAW_TEXT_TOOLBOX 82 Содржи наредби за форматирање за текст што се содржи во нацртан објект.
1d .uno%3AInsertHeaderFooterMenu 4a This submenu includes commands to add and remove page headers and footers.
14 .uno%3AInsertEndnote 41 Insert a endnote at the current cursor position without a prompt.
15 .uno%3AInsertFootnote 42 Insert a footnote at the current cursor position without a prompt.
1a .uno%3AInsertFootnotesMenu 67 The menu contains commands to insert a footnote or endnote with or without additional user interaction.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 3a Insert a frame by drawing its shape with the mouse cursor.
16 .uno%3AInsertFrameMenu 56 This submenu contains both interactive and non-interactive means of inserting a frame.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FSwapRow 5a Го преместува тековниот ред со соседниот подолу..
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FSwapColumn 5a Го преместува тековниот ред со соседниот подолу..
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FRemoveColumn 8a Ја брише тековната колона. Не е возможно да се избрише колоната со заглавие.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FRemoveRow 82 Го брише тековниот ред. Не е возможно да се избрише редот со заглавјето.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertTextColumn 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertRow 40 Вметнува нов ред под тековниот ред.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 43 Вметнува имиња на податочните серии.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertColumn 52 Вметнува нова колона после тековната колона.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData b7 Го отвара дијалогот за податочната табела каде што можете да ги уредувате податоците на графиконот.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisTitle d6 Кликнете на Наслов на оски Вклучи/Исклучи во лентата за форматирање за да се прикажат или скријат ознаките на оските.
23 SCH%3AEDIT%3ADLG_TITLE%3AEDT_Y_AXIS d9 Со опцијата за означување на Y оската се активира поднасловот. Внесете го саканиот наслов во соодветното поле за текст.
23 SCH%3AEDIT%3ADLG_TITLE%3AEDT_X_AXIS e7 Со опцијата за означување на X оската се активира насловот на x оската. Внесете го саканиот наслов во соодветното поле за текст.
12 .uno%3AToggleTitle c8 Клинете на Наслов Вклучи/Исклучи во лентата за форматирање за да се прикаже или скрие насловот и поднасловот.
25 SCH%3AEDIT%3ADLG_TITLE%3AEDT_SUBTITLE dc Опцијата за означување на Поднасловот го активира поднасловот. Внесете го саканиот наслов во соодветното поле за текст.
23 SCH%3AEDIT%3ADLG_TITLE%3AEDT_Z_AXIS d4 Опцијата за означување на Z оската го активира поднасловот. Внесете го саканиот наслов во соодветното поле за текст.
26 SCH%3AEDIT%3ADLG_TITLE%3AEDT_MAINTITLE ef Со опцијата за означување на Главниот наслов се активира главниот наслов. Внесете го саканиот наслов во соодветното поле за текст.
12 .uno%3AInsertTitle 84 Отвара дијалог за внесување или променување на насловите во графиконот.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2FLB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fbottom 53 Ја сместува легендата на дното од графиконот.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fright 53 Ја сместува легендата на десно од графиконот.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fleft 51 Ја сместува легендата на лево од графиконот.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Ftop 53 Ја сместува легендата на врвот од графиконот.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fshow 64 Одредува дали да се прикажува легендата за графиконот.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend bc За да ја прикажете или скриете легендата, кликнете на Легенда Вклучи/Исклучи во лентата заФорматирање.
13 .uno%3AInsertLegend 119 Го отвара дијалогот за Легенди, кој ви овозможува да ја променувате позицијата на легендите во графиконот и да одредите дали легендата ќе биде прикажана.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FNF_LABEL_DEGREES 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FCT_DIAL 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCT_DIAL 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_TEXT_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
18 .uno%3AInsertDescription 94 Го отвара Data labels дијалогот, кој ви овозможува да ги поставите податочните ознаки.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_VALUE_AS_NUMBER 72 Ги прикажува апсолутните вредности на секоја податочна точка.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_VALUE_AS_PERCENTAGE 6a Прикажува проценти од податочните точки во секоја колона.
3d %2Fmodules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FPB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 2f Opens a dialog to select the percentage format.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FNF_LABEL_DEGREES 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FPB_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Opens a dialog to select the number format.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_CATEGORY 65 Ги прикажува текстуланите ознаки на податочните точки.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_SYMBOL 85 Прикажува икони за легенда веднаш до секоја ознака на податочната точка.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FPB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 2f Opens a dialog to select the percentage format.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FPB_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Opens a dialog to select the number format.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_TEXT_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryZ 57 Ја прикажува Z оската како линија со потподелби.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryY 57 Ја прикажува Y оската како линија со потподелби.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryY 133 Главната оска и секундарната оска може да имаат различно исцртување во размер. На пример, можете да исцртате една оска во размер 2 сантиметри, а другата во 1,5 сантиметри.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryX 57 Ја прикажува секундарната Х оска во графиконот.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryX 42 Ја прикажува Х оската со потподелби.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 6a Ги одредува оските кои треба да се прикажат во графиконот.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
29 SCH%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_STAT%3ARBT_VARIANT 99 Ја прикажува варијантата помеѓу бројот на податочни точки и соодветните вредности.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 45 Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
2e SCH%3AMETRICFIELD%3ATP_STAT%3AMTR_FLD_BIGERROR 105 Ја прикажува највисоката маргина на грешки во % според највисоката вредност од податочната група. Поставете го процентот во копчето за вртење.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2Ftp_ErrorBars 45 Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars 45 Use the X or Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_PERCENT 81 Прикажува проценти. Приказот одговара на соодветната податочна точка.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_CONST 5a Ја прикажува константната вредност во процентот.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_NONE 72 Одредува дека не сакате било каква функција да биде прикажана.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FLB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FLB_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel6 2a Name of X variable in trend line equation.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowCorrelationCoefficient 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel9 2a Name of Y variable in trend line equation.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowEquation 35 Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel8 2e Trend line is extrapolated for lower x-values.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel7 2f Trend line is extrapolated for higher x-values.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel5 1d Name of trend line in legend.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 4f Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flinear 31 Поставување на резолуција.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flogarithmic 31 Поставување на резолуција.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FsetIntercept 5f For linear, polynomial and exponential trend lines, intercept value is forced to a given value.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fpower 31 Поставување на резолуција.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FTP_TRENDLINE 4f Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fpolynomial 35 A polynomial trend line is shown with a given degree.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FinterceptValue 23 Value of intercept if it is forced.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel3 20 Degree of polynomial trend line.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fexponential 31 Поставување на резолуција.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FmovingAverage 39 A moving average trend line is shown with a given period.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel4 43 Number of points to calculate average of moving average trend line.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 51 Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_2 11e Го променува исцртувањето во размер на Y оската. Оваа оска е видлива само кога барем една податочна серија е доделена кон неа и прегледот на оската е активен.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_GAP 63 Го одредува растојанието помеѓу колоните во проценти.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_OVERLAP 86 Ги одредува неопходните поставувања за преклопувачките податочни серии.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_CONNECTOR 143 За графиконите со "напластени" и "процентуални" колони (вертикални ленти), означи го ова поле за штиклирање за да ги поврзеш слоевите на колоната кој припаѓа заедно со овие линии.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FCB_CLOCKWISE ab The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_1 ac Оваа опција е преддефинирано активна. Сите податочни серии се подредени кон примарната Y оска.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FCT_ANGLE_DIAL 151 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FNF_STARTING_ANGLE 70 Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_CONTINUE_LINE 75 For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryY 3f Adds gridlines that subdivide the Y axis into smaller sections.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal 6a The Horizontal Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical 68 The Vertical Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the X axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryZ 2a Adds gridlines to the Z axis of the chart.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryY 2a Adds gridlines to the Y axis of the chart.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryX 2a Adds gridlines to the X axis of the chart.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryZ 3f Adds gridlines that subdivide the Z axis into smaller sections.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryX 3f Adds gridlines that subdivide the X axis into smaller sections.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FInsertGridDialog ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
15 .uno%3ADiagramObjects 58 Доделува одредени својства на избраниот објект.
d .uno%3AZTitle 52 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов.
d .uno%3AYTitle 98 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов или својствата заедно на сите наслови.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FshowlabelsCB 6a Одредува дали да ги прикаже или сокрие ознаките на оските.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FstackedCB 81 Доделува вертикална ориентација на текстот за содржината на ќелијата.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fodd 83 Ги распоредува броевите на оската, парните броеви пониско од непарните.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 6b Ја одредува насоката на текстот во содржината на ќелијата.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FdialCtrl 9e Со кликнување било каде на тркалото се одредува варијабилната ориентација на текстот.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FOrientDegree 6b Ви овозможува рачно да го внесете аголот на ориентацијата.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fauto 54 Автоматски ги распоредува броевите на оската.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Feven 83 Ги распоредува броевите на оската, непарните броеви пониско од парните.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FoverlapCB 79 Одредува дека текстот во ќелиите може да ги прекрие другите ќелии.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FbreakCB 30 Дозволува прелом на текст.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Ftile 52 Ги подредува броевите на оската еден до друг.
d .uno%3ALegend 7a Ја одредува границата, областа и знаковните атрибути за легендата.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB 119 Отвара дијалог каде што можете да ги уредувате својствата на секундарната Y оска. За да вметнете секундарна Y оска, изберете Вметни - Оски и изберете Y оска.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA 11b Отвара дијалог каде што можете да ги уредувате својствата на секундарната Х оска. За да вметнете секундарна Х оска, изберете Вметни - Оски и изберете X оска.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 87 Отвара дијаог, каде што можете да ги уредите својствата на избраната оска.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 72 Отвара дијалог за Y оската за промена на својствата на Y оската.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 28 Select to show all records of the query.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 28 Select to show all records of the query.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_TIME_RESOLUTION 32 Switches the display to show more or less details.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_REVERSE 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_MINOR_OUTER a9 Одредува дека ознаките на споредниот интервал се сместени од надворешната страна на оската.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_MINOR_INNER a7 Одредува дека ознаките за споредниот интервал се сместени од внатрешната страна на оската.
4d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_TICKS_INNER 7c Одредува дека ознаките се сместени од внатрешната страна на оската.
44 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_TICKS_OUTER 7e Одредува дека ознаките се сместени од надворешната страна на оската.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall 14f Отвара дијалог за Ѕид на графиконот, каде можете да ги промените својствата на ѕидот на графиконот. Ѕидот на графиконот е "вертикална" заднина позади податочната област на графиконот.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor 177 Го отвара дијалогот за Подот на графиконот, каде можете да ги промените својствата на подот на графиконот. Под на графиконот е долната област во 3Д графиконите. Оваа функција е достапна само за 3Д графикони.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea 146 Го отвара дијалогот за Област на графиконот, каде што можете да ги смените својствата за областа на графиконот. Област на графиконот е заднина позади сите елементи на графиконот.
f .uno%3ABackward 61 Го испраќа избраниот податочен ред наназад (кон лево)
e .uno%3AForward 68 Го донесува избраниот податочен ред нанапред (кон десно).
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FPolynomialsSpinButton 31 Поставување на резолуција.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FResolutionSpinbutton 31 Поставување на резолуција.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSplineTypeComboBox 19 Apply a line curve model.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSmoothLinesDialog 19 Apply a line curve model.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_center_y_rb 7f Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_end_rb 6a Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_center_x_rb 39 Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_start_rb 3d Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 2c Избира облик од листата.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FLB_AMBIENTLIGHT 2c Избира облик од листата.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FLB_SCHEME 49 Select a scheme from the list box, or click any of the check boxes below.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_SHADING 3f Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_1 45 Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the y axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_5 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the z axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the x axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FCBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 101 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FCBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_3 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_OBJECTLINES 42 Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.
d .uno%3AView3D 9f Opens a dialog to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and XY (Scatter) charts you can see 3D lines.
3d schart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 2c Избира облик од листата.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_ROUNDEDEDGE 18 Edges are rounded by 5%.
49 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination 5c Drag the right slider to set the vertical height and direction of the selected light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_6 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_2 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_4 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FLB_LIGHTSOURCE 2c Избира облик од листата.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_7 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_8 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FsecondaryXaxis 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fy 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fx 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fmaintitle 3f Внесува наслов на вашиот графикон.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fbottom 30 Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fsubtitle 45 Внесува поднаслов на вашиот графикон.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Ftop 2d Positions the legend to the top of the chart.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fright 2f Positions the legend to the right of the chart.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fz 75 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryXaxis 4c Внесува ознака за х оската (хоризонтално).
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryYaxis 48 Внесува ознака за у оската (вертикално).
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fshow 3f Внесува наслов на вашиот графикон.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryZaxis 59 Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fleft 2e Positions the legend to the left of the chart.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fnolines 3b Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 3e Отвара дијалог за тип на графикон.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fproperties 33 Opens a dialog to set the line or curve properties.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Flinetype 20 Choose the type of line to draw.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fsubtype 31 Поставување на резолуција.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 25 Click to go to the named wizard page.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Ftp_ChartType 25 Click to go to the named wizard page.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2F3dlook 43 Вметнува имиња на податочните серии.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fsort 6a Connects points by ascending X values, even if the order of values is different, in an XY scatter diagram.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fcharttype 31 Поставување на резолуција.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2F3dscheme 31 Поставување на резолуција.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fshape 2c Избира облик од листата.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fstack 3f Внесува наслов на вашиот графикон.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fontop 31 Stack series display values on top of each other.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fpercent 27 Stack series display values as percent.
42 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FCB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 11b For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FCB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 10d For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FRB_DATACOLS dc Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FED_RANGE a1 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FRB_DATAROWS d8 Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FIB_RANGE a1 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 4b Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_DOWN 36 Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2Ftp_DataSource a8 Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FLB_SERIES a8 Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FLB_ROLE a1 Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FIMB_RANGE_MAIN ff Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_REMOVE 35 Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FIMB_RANGE_CAT 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_ADD 88 Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FEDT_RANGE ff Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FEDT_CATEGORIES 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_UP 34 Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 67 Го променува подредувањето на податоците на графиконот.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 63 Го променува подредувањето на податоците во колоните.
10 .uno%3AScaleText c1 Повторно ја променува големината на текстот во графиконот кога ќе ја промените големината на графиконот.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement 16a Ги преместува сите објекти на графиконот на нивната стандардна позиција во тековниот графикон. Оваа функција не го променува типот на графиконот ниту други атрибути, освен позицијата на објектите.
12 .uno%3AContextType 58 Го прикажува името на тековниот тип на графикон.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 31 Resets the selected data point to default format.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 19 Deletes the Y error bars.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1c Deletes the mean value line.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 16 Deletes the R² value.
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 1f Deletes the trendline equation.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 18 Deletes all data labels.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 17 Deletes the major grid.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 19 Deletes the chart legend.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 1c Inserts a single data label.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 20 Deletes the selected data label.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 33 Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 48 Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R².
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 14 Inserts data labels.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 15 Inserts a minor grid.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 27 Opens a dialog to insert an axis title.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 26 Opens a dialog to insert chart titles.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 21 Opens a dialog to insert an axis.
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 17 Formats the major grid.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 22 Formats the stock gain indicators.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 17 Formats the chart area.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 29 Resets all data points to default format.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1a Formats the selected axis.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 19 Formats the chart legend.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 20 Formats the selected data point.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1b Formats the selected title.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 17 Formats the minor grid.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1a Deletes the selected axis.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 18 Formats the data series.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 22 Formats the stock loss indicators.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 17 Formats the chart wall.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 16 Formats the trendline.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 17 Deletes the minor grid.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 19 Formats the Y error bars.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 28 Opens a dialog to insert or delete axes.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1c Formats the mean value line.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 20 Formats the selected data label.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 15 Inserts a major grid.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 18 Formats the chart floor.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 18 Formats the data labels.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 1f Formats the trendline equation.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector b9 Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialog for the selected element.
17 HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 68 Click the Options label to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog.
14 HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN 71 Ги ресетира променетите вредности во стандардните вредности.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Fok 24 Saves all changes and closes dialog.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 45 Прикажува преглед на тековниот избор.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 45 Прикажува преглед на тековниот избор.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbfilterarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fassign 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2Frbassign 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Fcancel 27 Closes dialog and discards all changes.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fassignrb 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatcol 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptionsdialog%2Frevert 95 Променетите вредности повторно ги ресетира во вредностите стандардни за $[officename].
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatrow 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DEL 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
23 hid%2Fcui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Freset 3c Resets modified values back to the tab page previous values.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdestarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Frowref 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fremove 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 5e Ги применува сите промени и го затвора волшебникот.
23 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmacropage%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fformulasref 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
1a ui%2Fgradientpage%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 5e Ги применува сите промени и го затвора волшебникот.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmultipathdialog%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
1d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
2e modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Flibrary 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
2a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdataarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fcolref 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbprintarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
24 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdelabbrev 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdeldouble 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
2d modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fcatalogdialog%2Finsert 8c Ги применува изменетите или избраните вредности без затворање на дијалогот.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fdestination-button 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fformulabutton 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fvarbutton 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryupdateprogress%2FGalleryUpdateProgress 6d Го ажурира прегледот во прозорецот или во избраниот објект.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 54 Овозможува да се преименува избраниот објект.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 99 Користете ја наредбата Отвори за да го отворите избраниот објект во нова операција.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY 11e Го брише тековниот избор. Ако се избрани повеќе објекти, сите ќе бидат избришани. Најчесто, прашање за потврда се појавува пред да бидат избришани објектите.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 5c Го копира избраниот елемент во таблата за исечоци.
19 HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 64 Ја вметнува избраната слика како графика на подлогата.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 8d Го вметнува елементот што сте го пренеле во таблата со исечоци во документот.
17 HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 9a Стандардно, $[officename] ги вчитува и зачувува датотеките во форматот на датотека OpenDocument.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 9e Ви овозможува приказ на краток опис на менијата и иконите под покажувачот на глушецот.
e .uno%3AHelpTip b4 Ви овозможува приказ на имињата на икони и други содржини на Помошта на позицијата на покажувачот.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor2rb 31 Поставување на резолуција.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor1rb 31 Поставување на резолуција.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressnone 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ белешките.
32 GOODIES%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_EXPORT_EPS%3ARB_LEVEL2 df Изберете ја опцијата Ниво 2 ако вашиот излезен уред поддржува битмапи во боја, слики со палета од бои и компресирани слики.
35 GOODIES%3ACHECKBOX%3ADLG_EXPORT_EPS%3ACB_PREVIEW_EPSI b4 Одредува дали прегледуваната еднобојна слика во EPSI-формат се изнесува заедно со PostScript-датотеката.
35 GOODIES%3ACHECKBOX%3ADLG_EXPORT_EPS%3ACB_PREVIEW_TIFF b6 Одредува дали прегледуваната слика се изнесува во TIFF-формат заедно со моменталната PostScript-датотека.
29 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthmf-nospin 31 Поставување на резолуција.
14 HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionjpgnf 79 Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size
33 GOODIES%3AMETRICFIELD%3ADLG_EXPORT_EMET%3AMTF_SIZEY 27 Ја одредува висината.
26 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompresslzw 26 Sizes the preview of the master pages.
31 VCL%3ACHECKBOX%3ADLG_EXPORT_GIF%3ACBX_TRANSLUCENT 72 Одредува дали да ја зачува подлогата на сликата како проѕирна.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolordepthlb 6f Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ обележувачите.
20 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Frlecb 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ графиките.
32 GOODIES%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_EXPORT_EPS%3ARB_LEVEL1 d3 Компресија не е достапна на ова ниво. Изберете ја опцијата Ниво 1 ако вашиот PostScript-печатач не нуди можности за Ниво 2.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionlb 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
2e svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionmf-nospin 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionpngnf 62 Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image.
31 VCL%3ACHECKBOX%3ADLG_EXPORT_EPNG%3ACBX_INTERLACED 74 Одредува дали графиката треба да се зачува во Режим преплетено.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fcharsetlist 96 Изберете го множеството знаци од опциите кои се користат за внесување/изнесување.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ffixedwidth 61 Ги изнесува сите полиња со податоци со фиксна ширина.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fasshown bc Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fquoteall c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ftext 90 Изберете или внесете разделувач на текст, кој го опфаќа секое поле за податоци.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ffield 9a Изберете или внесете го разделувачот на поле, кој ги разделува полињата со податоци.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fcharsetdropdown 67 Го одредува множеството на знаци за изнесување на текст.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fdetectspecialnumbers 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftextdelimiter 61 Изберете знак за разделување на текстуални податоци.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fmergedelimiters 98 Комбинира последователни разделувачи и ги отстранува празните полиња со податоци.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Finputother 127 Ги одделува податоците во колони со користење на сопствен разделувач кој вие го одредувате. Забелешка: Сопствениот разделувач мора да постои во вашите податоци.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcharset b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcolumntype cf Изберете колона во прозорецот за преглед и изберете го типот на податоци кој ќе се примени на внесените податоци.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Flanguage 6a Ги одредува опциите за печатење за табеларните пресметки.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftoseparatedby 6d Изберете го разделувачот што се користи во вашите податоци.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcomma 64 Ги одделува податоците разделени со запирка во колони.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ffromrow 72 Го одредува редот каде што сакате да започнете со внесувањето.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftofixedwidth 7e Ги одделува податоците со фиксна ширина (ист број на знаци) во колони.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftab 6a Ги одделува податоците разделени со табулатори во колони.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2FTextImportCsvDialog 6a Ги поставува опциите за внесување на ограничени податоци.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fsemicolon 72 Ги одделува податоците разделени со точка и запирка во колони.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fspace 6d Ги одделува податоците разделени со празни места во колони.
2f SD%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT e2 Одредува дека сѐ што се протега надвор од максималниот опсег за печатење ќе биде скратено и нема да се вклучи во печатењето.
32 SD%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 73 Одредува дали да се распредели отпечатокот на повеќе страници.
25 SD%3AMODALDIALOG%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 102 Дијалогот Предупредување за опции за печатење се појавува кога поставувањата на страница не се совпаѓаат со дефинираниот опсег за печатење.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flf 8f Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на ред, „Linefeed - LF“, како прелом на пасус.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcr b8 Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на пасус и почеток на нов, „Carriage Return - CR“, како прелом на пасус.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcrlf 11b Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на пасус и почеток на нов, „Carriage Return - CR“, и знак со кој се обележува крај на ред, „Linefeed - LF“. Оваа опција е стандардна.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flanguage c8 Го одредува јазикот на текстот, ако тоа досега не е дефинирано. Ова поставување е достапно само при внесување.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Ffont 123 Со поставување на стандарден фонт, вие одредувате дека текстот треба да е прикажен во одреден фонт. Стандардните фонтови може да се изберат само при внесување.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcharset 86 Го одредува множеството знаци на датотеката за изнесување или внесување.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fgallerytitledialog%2FGalleryTitleDialog 57 Доделува наслов на избран објект од Галеријата.
16 HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 5c Наредбата Преглед ја прикажува избраната графика.
17 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 4c Ја вметнува избраната графика како врска.
15 HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 4a Ја брише избраната графика по потврдата.
12 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 68 Вметнува копија од графички објект директно во документ.
16 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 6d Одредува како избран графички објект е вметнат во документ.
1a HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 6a Поставува целата графика во документот да биде невидлива.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC cc Ако сте го исклучиле прикажувањето на графика, изберете ја наредбата Вчитај графика за да ја направите видлива.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 5c Ја копира избраната графика во таблата со исечоци.
1e HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 65 Ви овозможува да ја зачувате подлогата на веб-страница.
18 HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 89 Ја копира врската над која е покажувачот на глушецот во таблата со исечоци.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 76 Отвора дијалог каде што можете да ја зачувата избраната графика.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgallerygeneralpage%2Fname 35 Го прикажува името на темата.
2a SVX_TABPAGE_RID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERY_GENERAL 89 Страницата со ливче Општо ги прикажува општите својства на тековната тема.
b slot%3A5500 99 Креира нов документ користејќи или постоечки шаблон  или отвора документ за пример.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 2c Креира нов XForms документ.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 34 Креира нов  $[officename] документ.
16 HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 91 Креирај нов $[officename] документ. Кликни ја стрелката за избор на типот на документ.
d .uno%3ANewDoc 49 If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 65 Креира нов документ за табеларни пресметки ($[officename] Calc).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 32 Креира нов главен документ.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 3c Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress).
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 4e Креира нов документ со формули ($[officename] Math).
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 4c Креира нов документ за цртање ($[officename] Draw).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 116 Го отвора дијалогот за налепници каде можете да ги поставите опциите за вашите налепници, и потоа креира нов текст документ за налепниците ($[officename] Writer).
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 87 Го отвора волшебникот за бази на податоци за креирање на база на податоци.
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 87 Го отвора волшебникот за бази на податоци за креирање на база на податоци.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 f4 Го отвора дијалогот за визит карти каде можете да ги поставите опциите за вашите визит карти и потоа креира нов документ ($[officename] Writer).
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 51 Креира нов текстуален документ ($[officename] Writer).
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 2a Креира нов HTML-документ.
37 SVTOOLS_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_DOCTEMPLATE_BTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 94 Го отвора одбраниот документ или креира документ врз основа на одбраниот шаблон.
39 SVTOOLS_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_DOCTEMPLATE_BTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 7b Додава, отстранува, или преуредува шаблони или документи за пример.
1a HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 6a Ги прикажува својствата за одбраниот шаблон или документ.
17 HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 5d Ве придвижува едно ниво погоре, ако постои папката.
1a HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 66 Ви овозможува преглед на одбраниот шаблон или документ.
18 HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW 172 Листање на расположливите шаблони или документи за одбраната категорија. Одберете шаблон или документ и потоа кликнете, Отвори. За преглед на документот кликнете го Преглед копчето над полето на десно.
18 HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT a9 Ви овозможува преглед на шаблонот или документот, како и поглед на својствата на документот.
17 HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 59 Ве префрла на претходниот прозорец во дијалогот.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL 163 Категориите се прикажани во полето на левата страна од дијалогот за Шаблони и документи . Кликнете на категорија за да ги прикажете датотеките кои се поврзани со таа категорија во полетоНаслов .
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeldialog%2Fok 63 Креира нов документ за уредување насловен:"Налепница1"
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 92 Ви овозможува креирање на налепници. Налепниците се креираат во текст документ.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftype 22e Одберете ја големината на форматот која што сакате да ја користите. Форматите кои што се на располагање зависат од марката која што ја одбравте од листата Марка. Ако сакате да користите сопствен формат на налепница, одберете [Корисник], и потоа кликнете на јазичето Форматирај за да го дефинирате форматот.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fbrand 73 Одберете ја марката на хартија која што сакате да ја користите.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fcontinuous 44 Печати налепници на хартија во ролна.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftable d1 Одберете ја табелата од базата на податоци која ги содржи полињата кои сакате да ги користите во вашата налепница.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Finsert 48 Одберете ја базата на податоци Label text box.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fdatabase c2 Одберете ја базата на податоци која што сакате да ја користите како извор на податоци за вашата налепница.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fsheet 49 Печати налепници на поединечни листови.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Faddress d1 Креира налепница со вашата повратна адреса. Текстот кој што тековно се наоѓа воТекст на налепницатасе пребришува.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftextview d7 Внесете го текстот кој што сакате да се појави на налепницата. Исто така можете да вметнете и поле од бази на податоци.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2FCardMediumPage b3 Специфицирајте ја големината на текстот на налепницата и големината на хартијат.а за налепницата
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fwidth bc Приказ на ширината за налепницата или визит картата. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fhori ff Приказ на растојанието помеѓу левите рабови на соседните налепници или визит карти. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност овде.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Ftype 46 Внесете или изберете тип на налепница.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fvert 175 Приказ на растојанието помеѓу горните рабови на налепниците или на визит карти и на горниот раб на налепницата или на визит картата директно подолу. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fheight c9 Приказ на големината за налепницата или визит картата. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Fbrand 50 Внесете или изберете ја посакуваната марка.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fleft 124 Приказ на растојанието од левиот раб на страницата до левиот раб на првата налепница или визит карта.Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете ја вредноста тука.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fcols b9 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти кои сакате да се распоредат до ширината на страницата.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Ftop 150 Приказ на растојанието од горниот раб на страницата до горниот врв на првата налепница или бизнис карта. Ако користите сопствен формат, внесете сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2FLabelFormatPage 57 Постави ги опциите за форматирање на хартијата.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Frows c9 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти кои што сакате да се распоредат до целата висина на страницата.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fsave 6f Го зачувува тековниот формат на налепницата или визит карта.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsetup 1f Opens the Printer Setup dialog.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffloatingsync%2Fsync c8 Копирање на содржината на горната лева налепница или визит карта во преостанатите налепници или визит карти.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Frows b4 Внесете го бројот на редови со налепници или визит карти што сакате да ги имате на вашата страница.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsinglelabel 65 Печати една налепница или визит карта на една страница.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fcols b7 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти што сакате да ги имате во еден ред на вашата страница.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fentirepage 5c Креира цела страница со налепници или визит карти.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsynchronize af Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2FLabelOptionsPage fd Поставување на дополнителни опции за вашите налепници или визит карти, вклучувајќи поставувања за текстот, синхронизацијата и печатачот.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 57 Дизајнирајте и креирајте сопствени визит-карти
1a HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE 20b Одберетe ја големината на форматот што сакате да ја користите. Форматите кои што се на располагање зависат на вашиот избор од листата Марка. Ако сакате да користите сопствена големина за форматот, одберете [Корисник], и потоа кликнете го јазичето Форматирај за да го дефинирате форматот.
1b HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 6a Одберете ја марката на хартија што сакате да ја користите.
1b HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 55 Печатење на визит-карти на поединечни листови.
1a HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 4b Печатење визит карти на хартија во ролна.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Fautotext 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Ftreeview 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2FCardFormatPage 2d Define the appearance of your business cards.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Furl 2c Enter the address of your internet homepage.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fmobile 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fphone 21 Enter your home telephone number.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fcountry 30 Enter the name of the country in which you live.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname2 4b Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname2 4c Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fjob 23 Enter the title of your profession.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname2 4d Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fmobile 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fphone 25 Enter your business telephone number.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstate 3d Enter the name of the country where your business is located.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Furl 36 Enter the address of your company's internet homepage.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fslogan 21 Enter the slogan of your company.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany2 21 Enter additional company details.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2FBusinessDataPage a6 Contains contact information for business cards that use a layout from a 'Business Card, Work' category. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab.
15 HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 21 Opens the file in read-only mode.
16 HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4b Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position.
28 fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Fopen 1f Opens the selected document(s).
2d fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Ffile_type 78 Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the folder.
36 fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2FExplorerFileDialog 2d Opens, opens a remote file or imports a file.
2e fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Fnew_folder 15 Creates a new folder.
18 HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 3f To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename.
2d fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Ffile_name 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_LEVELUP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
18 HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 3f To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fyes 3c Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog.
14 HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fall 23 Click to delete all selected files.
14 HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 3d Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fno 48 Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog.
19 HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Enter or select the path from the list.
14 HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
33 SFX2%3ALISTBOX%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_DLG_LISTBOX 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 38 Closes the current document without exiting the program.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Saves the current document.
1c HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
35 fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Fconnect_to_server 7f Opens a dialog where you can set up connection to various types of servers, including WebDAV, FTP, SSH, Windows Share and CMIS.
14 HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
1c HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 15 Creates a new folder.
16 HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9a Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported.
15 HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 3d Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
14 HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
1f SVT_HID_FILESAVE_PLACES_LISTBOX 49 Displays "favourite" places, i.e. shortcuts to local or remote locations.
15 HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
13 HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
13 HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
1d HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fkeywords 4b Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fsubject 61 Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Ftitle 1f Enter a title for the document.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fcomments 2d Enter comments to help identify the document.
34 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2FDescriptionInfoPage 34 Contains descriptive information about the document.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Freset a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fuserdatacb 78 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fnameed 17 Displays the file name.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2FDocumentInfoPage 32 Contains basic information about the current file.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fadd 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fproperties ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2FCustomInfoPage 40 Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2Fupdate 17 Updates the statistics.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2FStatisticsInfoPage 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Fprotect d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Frecordchanges 5e Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Track Changes - Record Changes.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Freadonly 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2FSecurityInfoPage 2f Sets password options for the current document.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentfontspage%2FembedFonts 71 Mark this box to embed document fonts into the document file, for portability between different computer systems.
30 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentfontspage%2FDocumentFontsPage 2a Embed  document fonts in the current file.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 5a Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
29 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fassign 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
28 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fadmin 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
2c svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatatable 2c Select the data table for your address book.
2d svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatasource 2d Select the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
32 SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 54 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates.
2e SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
32 SFX2%3ALISTBOX%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 28 Lists the available template categories.
2e SFX2%3ALISTBOX%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
28 SFX2%3AEDIT%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 1e Enter a name for the template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 3b Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing.
32 SD%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGETILE a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
31 SD%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_DEFAULT 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Избира облик од листата.
33 SVTOOLS_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_RBT_ALL 1b Prints the entire document.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fexpander 6b Го поставува курсорот на следниот објект од избраниот тип.
32 SD%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGESIZE 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
34 SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PAPERFROMSETUP 146 За печатачите со повеќе фиоки опцијата Фиока за хартија од поставувањата на печатачот одредува дали фиоката за хартија ќе биде зададена од системските поставувања за печатачот.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
14 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
15 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
35 SVTOOLS_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_RBT_PAGES 38 Prints only the pages that you specify in the Pages box.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 53 Ја порамнува содржината на ќелијата на десно.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderlb 2c Избира облик од листата.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 26 Sizes the preview of the master pages.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
30 SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BACKGROUND 10d Одредува дали во испечатениот документ да се вклучат боите и објектите што се вметнати во подлогата на страницата (Форматирај - Страница - Подлога).
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 74 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ текстуални рамки.
36 STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_EQUATION_TEXT 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
2b SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ARB_NO 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 1d Inserts a row into the table.
31 STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_TITLEROW 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Freverseorder 3b Линиите се прикажани како криви.
2d SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_CTRLFLD 98 Одредува дали ќе се печатат контролните полиња на формите во текстуални документи.
39 SVTOOLS_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_RBT_SELECTION 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
37 SVTOOLS_NUMERICFIELD_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_NUM_COPIES 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
36 SVTOOLS_CHECKBOX_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_CBX_FILEPRINT 67 Prints to a file instead of to a printer. Select this box, and then choose a location to save the file.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 3e Отвара дијалог за тип на графикон.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 53 Ја порамнува содржината на ќелијата на десно.
2e SVTOOLS_EDIT_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_EDT_PAGES c7 To print a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To print single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using the format 3-6;8;10;12.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 31 Поставување на резолуција.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forientationlb 31 Поставување на резолуција.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 31 Поставување на резолуција.
34 SVTOOLS_CHECKBOX_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_CBX_COLLATE 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
39 SVTOOLS_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_BTN_PROPERTIES 24 Opens the printer properties dialog.
30 SVTOOLS_LISTBOX_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_LB_NAMES ab Lists the default printer for the current document. The information for the printer is displayed below this box. If you select another printer, the information is updated.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagemarginsb 2c Избира облик од листата.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 2c Избира облик од листата.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpaperspersheetlb 2c Избира облик од листата.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 26 Applies the master page to all slides.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 75 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ формули од табели.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbordercb 65 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ страници.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsheetmarginsb 65 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ страници.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagecols 31 Поставување на резолуција.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerows 2c Избира облик од листата.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 2c Избира облик од листата.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 65 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ страници.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Foptions ab Opens the Printer Options dialog where you can override the global printer options set on the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print panel for the current document.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Fproperties 4f Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document.
24 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Fname 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
32 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2FPrinterSetupDialog 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo e4 Отвара нов прозорец во вашиот преддефиниран клиент за е-пошта со тековниот документ како прилог. Се користи OpenDocument форматот.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS e6 Отвара нов прозорец во вашиот преддефиниран клиент за е-пошта со тековниот документ како прилог. Се користи форматот на Microsoft.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
f .uno%3ASendMail e9 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General is used.
15 HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
26 HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_PUSHBUTTON_CANCEL a7 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of the 'Heading 1' paragraph style in the source document.
b .uno%3AQuit 47 Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 27 Saves all open $[officename] documents.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fdelete 1d Deletes the selected version.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fcompare 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fshow 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fopen 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fversions 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Falways 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
36 sfx%2Fui%2Fversioncommentdialog%2FVersionCommentDialog 7d Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fsave a8 Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 51 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 19 Repeats the last command.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste a6 Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmove_right 0 
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmove_down 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fno_shift 0 
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fdivide 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fobjects 0 
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fadd 0 
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fsource 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Ftext 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fsubtract 0 
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fformats 0 
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fnone 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmultiply 0 
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fnumbers 0 
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Flist 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fdatetime 0 
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fcomments 0 
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
31 SVX%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_NOTES 0 
32 SVX%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_VALUES 0 
2b svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcalcsearchin 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcols 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Frows 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fallsheets 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
35 SVX%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH_ALL 89 Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents).
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fwholewords 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcase 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fbacksearch 67 Finds and selects the previous occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplacelist 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchlist 50 Enter the text that you want to find, or select a previous search from the list.
24 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnotes 48 In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fselection 29 Searches only the selected text or cells.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 38 Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 3a Finds or replaces text or formats in the current document.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearch 63 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
27 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnoformat 70 Click in the Find or the Replace box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
26 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplace 66 Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flayout c4 Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list.
36 SVX%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE_ALL 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flabel3 5f Shows more or fewer search options. Click this label again to hide the extended search options.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3a Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction.
30 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplace_backwards 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
2f SVX%3ACHECKBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REGEXP 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
2d svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcharwidth 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslikebtn 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslike a5 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Sounds button to specify the search options.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fshorterfld 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Flongerfld 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fotherfld 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Frelaxbox 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilaritybtn 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilarity 8c Find terms that are similar to the Find text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Similarities button to define the similarity options.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsearchattrdialog%2FSearchAttrDialog 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 SVX%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
31 SVX%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
10 HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel.down 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
19 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fsave a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
1b HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
11 HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
13 HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fup 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 48 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text.
13 HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
13 HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
16 HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 41 Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FBREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FUPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FCHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FMANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FAUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FTB_LINKS 68 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Fcategory 6c Lists the section that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section here.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Ffile 22 Lists the path to the source file.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Fapp 36 Lists the application that last saved the source file.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
3d SFX2%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3a SFX2%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2f SFX2%3AEDIT%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
29 SFX2%3AEDIT%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3AED_URL aa Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the Browse button and locate the file that you want to display.
34 SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
39 SFX2%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
38 SFX2%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
23 SFX2%3ATABPAGE%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES 36 Changes the properties of the selected floating frame.
39 SFX2%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
39 SFX2%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3a SFX2%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
3a SFX2%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_FRAMEPROPERTIES%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Fcontainer 44 Displays the image map, so that you can click and edit the hotspots.
1c svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Ftext 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FImapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_FREEPOLY 122 Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
1b svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Furl 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FdescTV 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Fnameentry 1b Enter a name for the image.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FframeCB a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Ftextentry 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Furlentry 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FIMapDialog 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2Fedit 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
11 HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
f HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
f HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
16 HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
10 HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
2b svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fundo 2a Reverse the last Accept or Reject command.
13 HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2Fchanges b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
12 HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
12 HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
d HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Faccept 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2FRedlineViewPage 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Freject 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
10 HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Facceptall 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Frejectall 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcommentedit 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Factionlist 5e Filters the list of changes according to the type of change that you select in the Action box.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdotdotdot 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frangeedit 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frange 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthorlist 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendtime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 3e Lets you choose a different data source for your bibliography.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
3c modules%2Fsbibliography%2Fui%2Fmappingdialog%2FMappingDialog a1 Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography.
11 SID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 46 To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 46 To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon.
f HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
3a modules%2Fsbibliography%2Fui%2Ftoolbar%2FTBC_BT_COL_ASSIGN 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
19 HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
15 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
14 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
14 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
14 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
13 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
16 HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 5e Enter a name for the record. The name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fbookmode 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumnssb 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumns 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fsinglepage 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
17 HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
14 HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 66 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at the moment the command is started.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F100pc 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
17 HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
15 .uno%3AZoom100Percent 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fzoomsb 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2FZoomDialog 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fautomatic 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 76 In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 89 Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen button or press the Esc key.
30 SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_SFX_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 2a Rejects the deletion for the current file.
31 SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_SFX_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 2c Performs the deletion in all selected files.
31 SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_SFX_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 2a Performs the deletion in the current file.
28 SFX2%3AMODALDIALOG%3ADLG_SFX_QUERYDELETE 21 Confirms or cancels the deletion.
14 HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 145 Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8b Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility aa Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2a Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 1b Deletes the current record.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 4d Inserts a comment around the selected text or at the current cursor position.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 82 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
17 HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
28 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP_LB_SUBSET 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Ffontlb 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2FSpecialCharactersDialog 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
d .uno%3ABullet 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
13 HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1b HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
16 HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 5f Inserts an image into the current document with optimal page wrapping and centered on the line.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 65 Inserts an embedded object into your document, including formulas, 3D models, charts and OLE objects.
23 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Furlbtn 3d Locate the file that you want to insert, and then click Open.
2b cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Fcreatefromfile 2c Creates an OLE object from an existing file.
22 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Ftypes 34 Select the type of document that you want to create.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Fcreatenew 42 Creates a new OLE object based on the object type that you select.
2e SO3%3AEDIT%3AMD_INSERT_OLEOBJECT%3AED_FILEPATH 5f Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search, to locate the file.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 87 Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 56 The submenu presents various sources that an image, audio or video can be insert from.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlstylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
2d SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME_LB_CTL_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text of the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
15 HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Femphasislb 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Findividualwordscb 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
31 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS_LB_UNDERLINE 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinecolorlb 24 Select the color for the overlining.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinelb 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2FEffectsPage 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
31 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS_LB_FONTCOLOR 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinecolorlb 25 Select the color for the underlining.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fstrikeoutlb 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Feffectslb 2f Select the font effects that you want to apply.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foutlinecb 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fshadowcb 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
2e SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS_LB_RELIEF e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fblinkingcb 4b Makes the selected characters blink. You cannot change the blink frequency.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fpositionlb 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
3c svx%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_CHARHIDDEN 1e Hides the selected characters.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcommented 50 Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fedit 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fadd 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatted 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fthousands 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcategorylb 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdelete 23 Deletes the selected number format.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcurrencylb 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatlb 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fnegnumred 32 Changes the font color of negative numbers to red.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Flanguagelb 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdenominatored 5e With fraction format, enter the number of places for the denominator that you want to display.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fsourceformat 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdecimalsed 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fengineering 56 With scientific format, Engineering notation ensures that exponent is a multiple of 3.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fleadzerosed 4c Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point.
2b SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_NOT_VISITED c1 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
27 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_VISITED bf Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
27 SW%3ACOMBOBOX%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_TARGET 71 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fnameed 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Feventpb 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furlpb 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftexted 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
20 SW%3AEDIT%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_URL 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fscalewidthsb 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffittoline 86 Stretches or compresses the selected text so that it fits between the line that is above the text and the line that is below the text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2FPositionPage 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsuperscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnormal 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffontsizesb 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fautomatic 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
34 SVX_METRICFIELD_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION_ED_HIGHLOW 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2F0deg 22 Does not rotate the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsubscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2F90deg 34 Rotates the selected text to the left by 90 degrees.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fpairkerning 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerningsb 98 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the text in the spin button.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2F270deg 35 Rotates the selected text to the right by 90 degrees.
33 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES_ED_ENDBRACKET 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Ftwolines 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
35 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES_ED_STARTBRACKET 85 Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2FTwoLinesPage 7f Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckApplySpacing 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckHangPunct 88 Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckForbidList 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FAsianTypography ea Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_REGISTER 149 Aligns the baseline of each line of text to a vertical document grid, so that each line is the same height. To use this feature, you must first activate the Register-true option for the current page style. To do this, choose Format - Page, click on the Page tab, and then select the Register-true box in the Layout settings area.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_AUTO 80 Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FParaIndentSpacing 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_FLINEINDENT 110 Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, click the Position tab, and then enter an amount in the Minimum space numbering <=> text box.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcomboLB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_CONTEXTUALSPACING 94 Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DELALL 81 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervalls as the default tab stops.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3c cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FParagraphTabsPage 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
3a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 67 Aligns the decimal separator of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FentryED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fmergewithnext 5e Merges the border style and the shadow style of the current paragraph with the next paragraph.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fmergeadjacent 9c Merges two different border styles of adjacent cells in a Writer table into one border style. This property is valid for a whole table in a Writer document.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fdistancemf 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2FBorderPage 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinestylelb 6c Click the border style that you want to apply. The border is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinecolorlb 46 Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s).
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fpresets 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fleftmf 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadowcolorlb 1e Select a color for the shadow.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Frightmf 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadows 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fbottommf 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Ftopmf 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fsync 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2FBackgroundPage 24 Set the background color or graphic.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fselectlb 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
14 HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftablelb 3f Select the area that you want to apply the background color to.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbackgroundcolorset 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Flink 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fshowpreview 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbrowse 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fpositionrb 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Farearb 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftilerb 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcomboLB_VERTALIGN 85 Select an alignment option for oversized or undersized characters in the paragraph relative to the rest of the text in the paragraph.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcheckCB_EXPAND 74 If the last line of a justified paragraph consists of one word, the word is stretched to the width of the paragraph.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcomboLB_LASTLINE 39 Specify the alignment for the last line in the paragraph.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Ftextdirectionlb 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcheckCB_SNAP 61 Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page - Text Grid.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FParaAlignPage 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Forigsize 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fheight 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fkeepscale 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fkeepsize 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fwidth 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fright 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2FCropPage 5c Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fheightzoom 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fbottom 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Ftop 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fleft 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fwidthzoom 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fcategory 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Flinkedwith 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnextstyle 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fautoupdate b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fdesc 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnamerw a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2FManageStylePage 27 Set the options for the selected style.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckAdaptBox 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboLayoutFormat 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonVert 0 
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboRegisterStyle dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonHorz 0 
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckRegisterTrue 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargTop 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargBot 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FPageFormatPage 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageFormat 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinWidth 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonPortrait 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageLayout 80 Specify whether to apply the formatting to odd pages, even pages, or to both odd and even pages that use the current page style.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonLandscape 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargRight e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinHeight 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPaperTray ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboTextFlowBox 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargLeft e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonEdit 0 
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonMore 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameFP 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckFooterOn 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameLR 65 Adds the header to both even and odd pages. This option is only available for the Default page style.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FHFFormatPage 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckAutofit 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargLeft 60 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin and the left edge of the header.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargRight 62 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right page margin and the right edge of the header.
2f svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckDynSpacing 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinSpacing 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinHeight 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
12 HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 0 
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
2d SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER_CB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
11 HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
2f SVX%3ACHECKBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
2f SVX%3ACHECKBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 7a Adds the footer to both even and odd pages. This option is only available if the current page uses the Default page style.
35 SVX%3ACHECKBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED_FIRST 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
32 SVX%3APUSHBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
33 SVX%3AMETRICFIELD%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
33 SVX%3AMETRICFIELD%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
30 SVX%3AMETRICFIELD%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
32 SVX%3AMETRICFIELD%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 SVX%3ACHECKBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 3d Changes the selected western characters to lowercase letters.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 82 Changes the case of the selected characters, or if the cursor is in a word, changes the case of all of the characters in the word.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 3a Changes the selected western characters to capital letters
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstyles 6d Opens the Styles and Formatting deck of the Sidebar where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fpositionlb 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fadjustlb 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight4ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstylelb 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft4ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 2f Aligns the right edges of the selected objects.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ad Horizontally aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b3 Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b3 Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fvert 63 Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fprop 27 Splits cells into rows of equal height.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fhori 60 Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2Fcountnf 55 Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the selected cell(s) into.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 27 Defines the class of the selected term.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fnewstyle%2Fstylename 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
29 SW%3AEDIT%3ADLG_SWDLG_STRINPUT%3AED_INPUT 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
18 HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 25 Enter a name for the selected object.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fdesc_entry e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fobject_title_entry 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2FObjectTitleDescDialog 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_CAP_STYLE 52 Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FTSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLineTabPage 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
21 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 1e Select the width for the line.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
2a cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_EDGE_STYLE 91 Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fnamedialog%2FNameDialog d Enter a name.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
c HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FNUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLineEndPage 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_HATCHING c9 Fills the selected object with the hatching pattern that you click in the list. To apply a background color to the hatching pattern, select the Background color box, and then click a color in the list.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_GRADIENT 47 Fills the selected object with the gradient that you click in the list.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_COLOR 44 Fills the selected object with the color that you click in the list.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FAreaTabPage 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fmodify 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fgradienttypelb 5c Lists the available gradients. Click the gradient that you want to apply, and then click OK.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterxmtr cc Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortolb 30 Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2FGradientPage 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterymtr c8 Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fadd 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
22 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fanglemtr 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfromlb 37 Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fbordermtr 9c Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfrommtr 72 Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortomtr 70 Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fmodify 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fadd 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinecolorlb 24 Select the color of the hatch lines.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinetypelb 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fanglemtr 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdistancemtr 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2FHatchPage 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBitmapTabPage 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
39 SVX%3AMETRICFIELD%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
3f SVX%3AMETRICFIELD%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
11 HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
38 SVX%3ATRISTATEBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
34 SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
f HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_OFF 1d Turns off color transparency.
35 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRANSPARENT 6e Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 74 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
31 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8c Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
34 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FTransparencyTabPage 50 Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
37 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FLB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
33 SVX_TRISTATEBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR_TSB_FULL_WIDTH 41 Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing or text object.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTextAttributesPage 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_CONTOUR 52 Adapts the text flow so that it match the contours of the selected drawing object.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_POSRECT f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FPositionAndSize 25 Resizes or moves the selected object.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_SIZERECT 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_ANGLE 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_RECT 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FNF_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FRotation 1c Rotates the selected object.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FSlantAndCornerRadius 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Foptimal 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Flength 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Fposition 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Fspacing 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcalloutpage%2Fvalueset 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
e .uno%3AForward 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAtChar 29 Anchors the selected item to a character.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar 29 Anchors the selected item to a character.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcolor 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fslant a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fnoshadow 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Findent 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistance 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fautosize 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistancey 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fright 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcontour 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fupright 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
16 HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
f .uno%3AFontWork 66 Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Foff 1c Removes baseline formatting.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Ftextcontour 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Forientation 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistancex 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Frotate 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fhori 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fvert 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fvertical 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fleft 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcenter 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTextAnimation 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FLB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_ENDLESS 9a Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
2d cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FNUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2Fdefault 3f Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2Fvalue 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2FRowHeightDialog 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2Fdefault 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2Fvalue 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2FColWidthDialog 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckHyphActive 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckWrapTextAuto 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinDegrees a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxHorzAlign 53 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
11 .uno%3AAlignBlock 4a Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinIndentFrom 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FCellAlignPage 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft 2c Aligns the contents of the cell to the left.
13 .uno%3AAlignVCenter 2f Sets the text orientation of the cell contents.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxVertAlign 33 Aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 2d Aligns the contents of the cell to the right.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Fdialcontrol 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckAsianMode 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Freferences 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
f .uno%3AAlignTop 3e Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
13 HID_TLB_TREELISTBOX 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
17 HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
18 HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 41 Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdoublesided 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
2e svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdoublesidedillum 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Finvertnormals 19 Inverts the light source.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fgeometry 108 Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fobjspecific 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fscaleddepth 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fangle 45 Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdepth 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdiagonal 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fhori 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fspherical 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fveri 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fflat 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ffocal 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fslant 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fshadow 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdistance 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fmode 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Frepresentation 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fambientcolor 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flightcolor1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flight8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flight 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcircley 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexture 11f Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface texture to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexobjy 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftextype 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexreplace 24 Applies the texture without shading.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexmodulate 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcolor 1e Converts the texture to color.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexobjx 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexparallelx 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexfilter 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcirclex 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexparallely 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fintensity 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fspeccolor 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fillumcolor 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fobjcolor 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ffavorites 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fmaterial 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fverbottom 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhornone 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fvernone 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhordistance 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fvertop 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhorcenter 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fvercenter 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhorright 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fhorleft 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fdistributionpage%2Fverdistance 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignoreall 7e Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck.
f .uno%3ASpelling 41 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fchange 8a Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fsuggestionslb 82 Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Correct or Correct All.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignore 39 Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fundo 69 Click to undo the last step of your spellcheck session. Click again to undo the previous step, and so on.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fcheckgrammar 58 Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fsentence 91 Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Foptions 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fchangeall 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Flanguagelb 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fautocorrect 72 Adds the current combination of the incorrect word and the replacement word to the AutoCorrect replacements table.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fadd 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignorerule 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
1f .uno%3ASetLanguageSelectionMenu b5 Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the selected text. Choose None to exclude the selected text from spellchecking and hyphenation.Choose More to open a dialog with more options.
1d .uno%3ASetLanguageAllTextMenu a3 Opens a submenu. Choose a language for all text. Choose None to exclude all text from spellchecking and hyphenation.Choose More to open a dialog with more options.
1f .uno%3ASetLanguageParagraphMenu bd Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the current paragraph. Choose None to exclude the current paragraph from spellchecking and hyphenation.Choose More to open a dialog with more options.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu b5 Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the selected text. Choose None to exclude the selected text from spellchecking and hyphenation.Choose More to open a dialog with more options.
3c svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2FChineseConversionDialog 8d Translates the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is translated.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8d Translates the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is translated.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2FChineseDictionaryDialog 23 Edit the Chinese translation terms.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Flangcb 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
2b SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3AED_REPL 85 Displays a suggested replacement for the current word. You can also type a new word in this box, or click a word in the Synonym list.
2e SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ALB_MEAN 6c Select the meaning that matches the context of the current word, and then select a word in the Synonym list.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fleft 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
2e SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ALB_WORD 46 Displays the current selection, or the word that contains that cursor.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 3c Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx5 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Ftol4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Freplace 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor5 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
17 HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a1 Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the eyedropper tool is selected.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fpipette 8d Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace.
16 HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 ab Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the eyedropper, and then click a color in the selected image.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 5b Opens the eyedropper dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2Fedit 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2FApplyAutoFmtPage 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
20 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnew 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftextonly 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnewtext f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftabview 13b Lists the entries for automatically replacing words, abbreviations or word parts while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Forigtext 272 Enter the word, abbreviation or word part that you want to replace while you type. Wildcard character sequence .* in the end of word results the replacement of the word before arbitrary suffixes, too. Wildcard character sequence .* before the word results the replacement after arbitrary prefixes, too. For example, the pattern "i18n.*" with the replacement text "internationalization" finds and replaces "i18ns" with "internationalizations", or the pattern ".*..." with the replacement text "…" finds and replaces three dots in "word..." with the typographically correct precomposed Unicode horizontal ellipsis ("word…").
2c cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2FAcorReplacePage 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fautodouble 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fnewdouble 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdouble ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrevlist 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrev d3 Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdoublelist b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Flang 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
2a cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2FAcorExceptPage 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdefaultsingle 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fenddouble 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdoublereplace 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fchecklist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartsingle 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Flist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
32 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2FApplyLocalizedPage 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
17 HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
12 HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR ad To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
12 HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
17 HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
15 HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
16 HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
11 HID_LINGU_REPLACE 83 Click the word to replace the highlighted word for the current session only. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fdelete 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fmaxentries 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fminwordlen 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fwhenclosing a1 Makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fcollectwords 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Facceptwith 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fshowastip 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fappendspace 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fentries ea Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, select "When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents".
32 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fenablewordcomplete 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2Fproperties 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2Fmain 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2FSmartTagOptionsPage 56 When you have installed at least one Smart Tag extension, you see the Smart Tags page.
d HID_NUM_RESET 5c Removes the numbering or bullets from the current paragraph or from the selected paragraphs.
1e .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDial 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2Fvalueset 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2FPickBulletPage 38 Displays the different bullet styles that you can apply.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2Fvalueset 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2FPickNumberingPage 3b Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2Fvalueset 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2FPickOutlinePage 8e Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Flinkgraphics 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Fvalueset 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2FPickGraphicPage 4f Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in a bulleted list.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fallsame 4f Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Forientlb 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fkeepratio 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Flevellb 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fnumfmtlb 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fprefix 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbullet 4a Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fcharstyle 45 Select the Character Style that you want to use in the numbered list.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsuffix a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbitmap 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsublevels dd Enter the number of previous levels to include in the numbering style. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering style, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1".
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fwidthmf 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fheightmf 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fstartat 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Findentatmf 7c Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Falignedatmf 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumdistmf 78 Enter the minimum amount of space to leave between the right edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumalignlb cb Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fatmf 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumfollowedbylb 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentatmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
a 1241731589 15 Creates a new script.
a 1241731587 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
a 1241731592 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
2a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fimport 66 Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fnewlibdialog%2FNewLibDialog 1c Enter a name for the script.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewmodule 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Forganize 28 Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fdelete 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
a 1241731591 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Frun 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
31 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fedit 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
37 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewlibrary 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
30 BASCTL_PUSHBUTTON_RID_MACROCHOOSER_RID_PB_ASSIGN 7f Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a shortcut key combination, or an event.
2d BASCTL_PUSHBUTTON_RID_MACROCHOOSER_RID_PB_ORG 74 Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries.
11 HID_BASICIDE_LIBS a5 Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog.
2b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Fedit 2f Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
28 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fedit 51 Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
a 1241731590 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
2e modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Flibrary 48 Ги листа постоечките макроа и дијалози.
3a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacronameedit 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Fnewdialog 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
13 HID_BASICIDE_MACROS 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
2b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Flibrary 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Fnewmodule 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Flocation 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
2d modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Fdelete 57 Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fpassword 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
27 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fnew 16 Creates a new library.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 6e Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 2b Opens a dialog where you can start a macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FconfirmpassEntry 32 Reenter the new password for the selected library.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FnewpassEntry 2e Enter a new password for the selected library.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FoldpassEntry 34 Enter the current password for the selected library.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FPasswordDialog 2e Protects the selected library with a password.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 50 Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2Freplace 43 Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library.
2f modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2Fref 68 Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME.
3b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2FImportLibDialog 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fsavein 47 Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fmodify 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fdown 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fmenuedit 29 Opens a submenu with additional commands.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fup 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Ftoplevelbutton 71 Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Ftoplevellist 32 Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit.
9 705499974 ad Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fentries 6c Displays a list of the available menu commands for the selected menu in the current application or document.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2FMenuAssignPage 6b Customizes and saves current menu layouts as well as creates new menus. You cannot customize context menus.
22 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Freset 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Foffice 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fmodule 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
25 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fcategory 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
26 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fshortcuts be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
21 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fsave 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
25 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Ffunction dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
2c cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2FAccelConfigPage 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
21 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fkeys 46 Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fchange 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
21 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fload 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 49 Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
1d CUI_HID_SVX_DOWN_TOOLBAR_ITEM 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
1b CUI_HID_SVX_UP_TOOLBAR_ITEM 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 22 The Toolbar button opens a submenu
33 SVTOOLS_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_RBT_ALL 1b Prints the entire document.
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 6c Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FdeleteButton 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FimportButton 24 Adds new icons to the list of icons.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FIconSelector 24 Adds new icons to the list of icons.
2f SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ATP_CONFIG_EVENT%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
2f SFX2%3APUSHBUTTON%3ATP_CONFIG_EVENT%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
5 40000 b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
9 705547787 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
10 HID_CONFIG_EVENT 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fhelp 27 Displays the help page for this dialog.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ftest 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fsave 56 Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fedit 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fopen 4d Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
25 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fnew 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fdelete 44 Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ffilterlist 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
33 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fdescription 32 Внесете коментар (по избор).
35 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Finterfacename 4d Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fextension 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Ffiltername 78 Изберете ја апликацијата која сакате да ја користите со филтерот.
3f filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2FXmlFilterTabPageGeneral 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Ftempimport 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltexport 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltimport 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowsetemp 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fdoc 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
4d filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2FXmlFilterTabPageTransformation 31 Enter or edit file information for an XML filter.
21 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
21 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
29 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 59 Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing.
22 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
21 HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE a0 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
1c HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
1c HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
1a HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
1b HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
1e HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2FHangulHanjaOptDialog 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
1b HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
33 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_CB_HANJA_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
34 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_CB_HANGUL_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
1e HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
3d SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
14 HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
33 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_LB_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
3d SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_CB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
1a HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
2f SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_PB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
42 SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
42 SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
3e SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_RB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fautoreplaceunique 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fshowrecentfirst 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fignorepost 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fdelete 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fedit 57 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fnew 4b Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaadddialog%2Fentry 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaadddialog%2FHangulHanjaAddDialog ae Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Foriginal 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fdelete 1b Deletes the selected entry.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fnew 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fedit1 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaeditdictdialog%2Fbook 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 22 Opens the View Certificate dialog.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
10 .uno%3ASignature 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
28 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FUPDATE_ALL 8c By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
2a desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FDESCRIPTIONS 95 While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
25 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FINSTALL 54 When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdateinstalldialog%2FUpdateInstallDialog ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
2a desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FUpdateDialog ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 89 Inserts an invisible optional hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 6c Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks like non-breaking space, soft hyphen, and optional break.
14 HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
12 HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
15 HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
e .uno%3AGallery 70 Opens the Gallery deck of the Sidebar, where you can select images and audio clips to insert into your document.
14 HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
14 HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Faddall 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffindfiles 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
13 HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 28 Displays a preview of the selected file.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Fpreview 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Fadd 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffiles 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffiletype 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 45 Displays the grid lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 45 Displays the grid lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.
17 .uno%3AHelplinesVisible 45 Displays the grid lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2d Specifies the display options for snap lines.
4 6694 82 Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
25 vnd.sun.star.findbar%3AFocusToFindbar 5f Toggle the visibility of the Find toolbar to search for text or navigate a document by element.
e .uno%3ASidebar a4 The Sidebar is a vertical graphical user interface that primarily provides contextual properties, style management, document navigation, and media gallery features.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or audio file into your document.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchangepath 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautodownload 90 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 75 Го прекинува симнувањето и ги брише делумно симнатите датотеки.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 44 Продолжува со паузираното симнување.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 3e Ги инсталира симнатите ажурирања.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
a 2180256277 94 Изберете ја екстензијата која сакате да ја отстраните и потоа кликнете Отстрани.
a 2180256279 a1 Изберете ја екстензијата која сакате да ја оневозможите и потоа кликнете на Оневозможи.
a 2180256278 99 Изберете ја екстензијата која сакате да ја овозможите и потоа кликнете на Овозможи.
34 desktop%2Fui%2Fshowlicensedialog%2FShowLicenseDialog 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
a 2180256276 63 Select a top-level node in the list box, and then click Add to add new extensions to that location.
5 42769 cb Select the directory where you want to add a new extension, or select the extensions that you want to remove, enable, disable, or export. To select multiple extensions, press the Ctrl key when you click.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 57 Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension.
5 42772 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and exports %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fexpander 2c Избира облик од листата.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 2c Избира облик од листата.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm2ed 2c Избира облик од листата.
26 uui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FconfirmpassEntry 2c Избира облик од листата.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm1ed 2c Избира облик од листата.
10 HID_PASSWD_TABLE 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 1d Re-enter the master password.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 55 Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords.
39 uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2FSetMasterPasswordDialog 43 Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fsafemodedialog%2FSafeModeDialog b0 Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Flocation 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fselect 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fcert 4a Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fpdfsignpage 4a Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablea11y 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeform 68 Дозволени се само пополнување на полињата во формуларот.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeinsdel 74 Дозволени се само вметнување, бришење и ротирање на страниците.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangenone 46 Не се дозволени промени на содржината.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprinthigh 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintnone 4a Печатењето на документот не е дозволено.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopeninternet 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopenpdf c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fdefault 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fconvert d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexport 145 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows you to link to those objects by name from other documents.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2FPdfLinksPage 145 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows you to link to those objects by name from other documents.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblelevel 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fformat 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintlow 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2FPdfViewPage a1 Изберете за да создадете PDF датотека која ќе ја прикажува само содржината на страницата.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Foutline 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fforms 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Femptypages 191 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fcomments 44 Select to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpages 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
34 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblebookmark 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fbookmarks ef Select to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeany 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fall 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontfacinglayout 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
1f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Ftsa 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2FPdfUserInterfacePage 4b Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window.
27 FILTER_EDIT_RID_PDF_EXPORT_DLG_ED_PAGES 39 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF).
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Frange 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fallowdups 9c Allows you to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fselection 3c Ја изнесува тековната селекција.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpdfa ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexporturl 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpage 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Flosslesscompress 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fsinglelayout 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffirstonleft f9 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Ftagged 46 Select to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpageonly a1 Изберете за да создадете PDF датотека која ќе ја прикажува само содржината на страницата.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Feffects 4c Select to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
2d filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangecomment 68 Дозволени се само пополнување на полињата во формуларот.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fsetpassword 74 Кликнете за да отворите дијалог каде можете да внесете лозинка.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2FPdfSecurityPage 74 Кликнете за да отворите дијалог каде можете да внесете лозинка.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fembed 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Freason 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Freduceresolution 50 Select to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fresolution 4e Изберете ја целната резолуција за сликите.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fthumbs 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fjpegcompress 61 Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwin 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fopen 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fallbookmarks 46 Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitdefault b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fquality 4d Внесете ниво на квалитет за JPEG компресија.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwidth 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fcontact 44 Allows you to optionally select a Time Stamping Authority (TSA) URL.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitvis 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablecopy 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fpassword 60 Enter the password used for protecting the private key associated with the selected certificate.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fdefaultlayout 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fdisplay 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontlayout 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fmenubar 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fresize 4b Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fcenter 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Ftoolbar 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fwindow 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF 7b Exports the entire file to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then sends the result as an attachment to an e-mail message.
23 uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2Fcancel 2d Does not allow macros in the document to run.
1f uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2Fok 25 Allows macros in the document to run.
2c uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FviewSignsButton 30 Opens a dialog where you can view the signature.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FalwaysTrustCheckbutton 3d Adds the current macro source to the list of trusted sources.
2c uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FMacroWarnMedium 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
24 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fdescription 21 Type a purpose for the signature.
21 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fviewcert 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
27 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
2b svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesdetails 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelslist 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
33 SVTOOLS_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRINTDLG_RBT_ALL 1b Prints the entire document.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsadd 3c Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2FDataNavigator 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
1f svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2Ftoolbar 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsremove 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsbutton 29 Adds, renames, and removes XForms models.
1d svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2Fitems 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstances 3a This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsedit 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesadd 30 Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance.
22 svx%2Fui%2Faddmodeldialog%2Fmodify d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesedit 39 Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesremove 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fcalculate 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Freadonly 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2FAddDataItemDialog 48 Adds a new item or edits the selected item in the XForms Data Navigator.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fconstraint 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fdatatype 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Freadonlycond 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fconstraintcond 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fname 1b Enter the name of the item.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fvalue 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frelevant 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frequired 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frequiredcond 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frelevantcond 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
24 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2Fedit 4f Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces.
29 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2Fcondition 12 Enter a condition.
32 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2FAddConditionDialog 5b Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fedit 1d Edits the selected namespace.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fdelete 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fadd 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fnamespaces 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 125 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f3 Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE ac Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault e2 Кликнете на иконата Печати датотека директноза да го печатите активниот документ со стандардните поставувања за печатење.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 2cb Црта текстуално поле со ветикална насока на текстот каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде било во документот и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Исто така можете да го поместите покажувачот каде што сакате да го додадете текстот, влечете го полето за текст и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Ова е достапно само кога е овозможена поддршка за азијски јазици.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 37a Црта линија која завршува со правоаголно балонче со вертикална насока на текстот од каде влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете ја страна на балончето за да ја промените неговата големина. За да додадете текст, кликнете на работ од балончето и потоа напишете го или вметнете го Вашиот текстот. За да го измените правоаголното балонче во заоблено, влечете го најголемата аголна страна кога покажувачот ќе се смени во рака. Ова е достапно само кога е овозможена поддршка за азијски јазици.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 304 Црта линија која завршува со правоаголно балонче со хоризонтална насока на текстот од каде влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете ја страна на балончето за да ја помените неговата големина. За да додадете текст, кликнете на работ од балончето и потоа напишете го или вметнете го Вашиот текстот. За да го измените правоаголното балонче во заоблено, влечете го најголемата аголна страна кога покажувачот ќе се смени во рака.
b .uno%3ALine 82 Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee 1af Вметнува анимиран текст со хоризонтална насока на текстот во тековниот документ.  Влечете го полето за текст, потоа напишете го или вметнете го вашиот текст. За да доделите ефект за анимација, изберете Формат - Текст - Анимација на текст.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 22a Црта линија составена од серии од прави линии. Влечете за да нацртате линија, кликнете за да ја дефинирате крајната точка на линијата и потоа влечете за да нацртате нова линија. Кликнете два пати за да завршите со цртањето. За да креирате затворена форма, кликнете два пати на почетната точка од линијата.
f .uno%3ADrawText e1 Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text.
e .uno%3AEllipse 178 Црта елипса каде што влечете во тековниот документ.Кликнете каде што сакате да нацртате елипса и влечете додека да ја добиете саканата големина. За да нацртате круг, задржете го тастерот Shift додека влечете.
b .uno%3ARect 1c9 Црта правоаголни каде што повлекувате во тековниот документ. За да нацртате квадрат, држете го притиснат тастерот Shift додека влечете. Кликнете каде што сакате да го поставите аголот на правоаголникот и влечете додека да ја добиете саканата големина.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 2b1 Црта мазна Bezier крива. Кликнете каде што сакате да започнува кривата, влечете, отпуштете, и потоа движете го покажувачот каде што сакате да завршува кривата и кликнете. Движете го покажувачот и повторно кликнете за да и додадете на кривата права линија. Кликнете два пати за да завршите со цртањето. За да креирате затворена форма, кликнете два пати на почетната точка на кривата.
a .uno%3AArc 2a4 Црта лак во тековниот документ. За да нацртате лак, влечете елипса додека да ја постигнете саканата големина, и потоа кликнете за да ја дефинирате почетната точка на лакот. Позиционирајте го покажувачот каде што сакате да ја поставите крајната точка и кликнете. Не мора да кликнете на елипсата. За да нацртате кружен лак задржете го притиснат тастерот Shift додека влечете.
a .uno%3APie 30a Црта исполнета форма, дефинирана од елипсовиден лак и двата негови радиуси во тековниот документ. За да нацртате елипсовидна пита, влечете елипса додека ја постигнете саканата големина, а потоа кликнете за да го дефинирате неговиот прв радиус. Поместете го покажувачот каде што сакате да го ставите вториот радиус и кликнете. Не мора да кликате на елипсата. За да нацртате кружна пита задржете го притиснат Shift додека влечете.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw f9 Кликнете за да ја отворите или затворите лентата Цртање , каде што можете да додадете  форми, линии, текст и повици во тековниот документ.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled 194 Црта произволна линија каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За да ја завршите линијата, отпуштете го копчето на глувчето. За да нацртате затворена форма, отпуштете го копчето на глувчето до почетната точка на линијата.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 327 Црта исполнета форма, дефинирана од кружен лак и неговиот дијаметар во тековниот документ. За да нацртате дел од круг, влечете го кругот додека ја постигнете саканата големина, а потоа кликнете за да го дефинирате почетна точка на дијаметарот. Поместете го покажувачот каде што сакате да ја ставите крајната точка од дијаметарот и кликнете. Не мора да кликате на елипсата. За да нацртате дел од елипса задржете го притиснат Shift додека влечете.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 3f Го отвара алатникот Дизај на форма
d .uno%3AConfig c7 Иконата Контроли на форма отвора алатникот со алатките кои Ви се потребни за да креирате интерактивна форма.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 30 Креира поле за означување.
b .uno%3AEdit 26 Креира поле за текст.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 18 Креира копче.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 2d Креира форматирано поле.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 26 Креира поле за избор.
e .uno%3AListBox 26 Креира поле за листа.
c .uno%3ALabel 38 Креира поле за приказ на текст.
f .uno%3AComboBox 2f Креира комбинирана листа.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 43 Го отвара алатникот Повеќе контроли.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 56 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за шема.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 5a Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за валута.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 5b Избраната контрола се претвора во нумеричко поле.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за време.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за датум.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType e6 Повикува подмени каде што може да изберете тип на контрола со која ќе ја замените тековно избраната компонента во документот.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за текст.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 60 Избраната контрола се претвора во контрола за слика.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 61 Избраната контрола се претвора во комбинирана листа.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 60 Избраната контрола се претвора во избор за датотеки.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 4c Избраната контрола се претвора во ознака.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за листа.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 62 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за означување.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 4a Избраната контрола се претвора во копче.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 5a Избраната контрола се претвора во копче со слика.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 5f Избраната контрола се претвора во форматирано поле.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 5c Избраната контрола се претвора во копче за опција.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fshowcoldialog%2FShowColDialog 7e In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple entries.
14 SID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 44 Го повикува дијалогот Покажи  колони.
f SID_FM_SHOWCOLS 9a Повикува подмени каде што можете да ги изберете колоните кои ќе се покажат повторно.
e SID_FM_HIDECOL 2e Ја крие избраната колона.
10 SID_FM_DELETECOL 41 Ја бриште тековно избраната колона.
12 SID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 6a Кликнете Сите Ако сакате да Ви бидат покажани сите колони.
10 SID_FM_CHANGECOL c2 Отвора подмени за избор на податочно поле за замена на избраното податочното полево контролата за табела.
10 SID_FM_INSERTCOL b0 Повикува подмену за да го изберете податочното поле за да го придружите на контролата за табела.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 40 Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 4d Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin box.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
5 37929 54 Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
5 37928 55 Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
5 37930 50 Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
13 HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 31 Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
12 HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 5a Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
c HID_PROP_TAG 4d Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.
d HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
15 HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 3f You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.
13 HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 5e Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button type.
18 HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1e Inserts a thousands separator.
10 HID_PROP_TABSTOP 54 The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key.
19 HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 65 Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 16 Sets the default time.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 5e Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider at the scrollbar.
18 HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 31 Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 5e For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 16 Sets the default date.
19 HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
18 HID_PROP_DEFAULT_CHECKED 42 Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default.
11 HID_PROP_TABINDEX 75 The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key.
f HID_PROP_BORDER 62 Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".
16 HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 59 Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
10 HID_PROP_ENABLED 69 If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
12 HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 50 Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout.
10 HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 32 Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
11 HID_PROP_TRISTATE 77 Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values.
12 HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 32 Specifies the row height of a table control field.
12 HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR b5 If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.
5 37933 cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
11 HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 42 Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5e If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button.
15 HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 73 Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow.
1c HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 29 Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 53 Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar.
5 37927 52 Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large.
13 HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 37 Determine here the desired format for the date readout.
15 HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3d Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events.
11 HID_PROP_EDITMASK 75 Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 122 Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
15 HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
5 37931 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
17 HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 3e You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.
e HID_PROP_WIDTH 31 Sets the column width in the table control field.
47 modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Flabelselectiondialog%2FLabelSelectionDialog 5e Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field.
5 37967 54 Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat".
d HID_PROP_SPIN 6e The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.
12 HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8b Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.
17 HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 36 Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
15 HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
e HID_PROP_ALIGN 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
19 HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 4c Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
11 HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5b Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE bb Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area.
13 HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 37 You can define the desired format for the time display.
e HID_PROP_LABEL 55 The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.
13 HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 51 The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.
1b HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 3a Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.
12 HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 6f The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button.
15 HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 95 You can determine here a value for the control field to impede the user to enter a lesser value. That means that a lesser value will not be possible.
15 HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 2d Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.
12 HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 1e Determines spin box intervals.
15 HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5b If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted.
17 HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 54 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text.
15 HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
10 HID_PROP_DATEMIN 33 Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 5a Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
10 HID_PROP_HELPURL 83 Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field.
d HID_PROP_NAME 87 On the Properties tab page, specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, specifies the name for the form.
10 HID_PROP_HSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 55 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin box control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
5 37965 6c Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control.
17 HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 73 The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.
10 HID_PROP_DATEMAX 54 Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
13 HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 41 Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
14 HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
11 HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
10 HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 54 Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
f HID_PROP_REPEAT 7d Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
18 HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 31 Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
18 HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 2f Sets the background color of the control field.
5 37966 65 Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look.
18 HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5a Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in Spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
13 HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 85 Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents.
1b HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 4a Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet.
11 HID_PROP_REFVALUE d3 You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field.
16 HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 49 Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers.
14 HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN a9 Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.
16 HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL 34 Defines how an empty string input should be handled.
13 HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE b3 With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection.
17 HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 3e Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes.
17 HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL f9 While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields.
13 HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
14 HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
12 HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
14 HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 76 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed at the same time.
1e HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
17 HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3b The When initiating event occurs when an action is started.
f HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
13 HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 54 The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field.
18 HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 59 The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed.
15 HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
11 HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4b The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus.
13 HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
10 HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
14 HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
d HID_EVT_KEYUP 5c The Key release event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 61 In this dialog you can specify, among others,  the data source and the events for the whole form.
18 HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 32 Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer.
16 HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 40 Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information.
18 HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
13 HID_EVT_POSITIONING 53 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.
11 HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
18 HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 4b The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed.
e HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
14 HID_EVT_ERROROCCURED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
15 HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 51 The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form.
13 HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 72 The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source.
17 HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
11 HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
11 HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
10 HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
10 HID_EVT_RELOADED 4a The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
11 HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
12 HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
10 HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
14 HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6b If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
15 HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 80 If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform.
18 HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
14 HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
13 HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
15 HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fd Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
19 HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 8a Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement.
e HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
18 HID_PROP_FILTER_CRITERIA 8c Enter the required conditions for filtering the data in the form. The filter specifications follow SQL rules without using the WHERE clause.
16 HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
18 HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
1a HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
12 HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
13 HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
2c modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FautoB 6f Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to their position in the document.
2c modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FdownB 5d Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order.
2a modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FupB 5c Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order.
2f modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FCTRLtree 76 Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 79 In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key.
d HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
f .uno%3AAddField 48 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
14 SID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1c Renames the selected object.
d SID_FM_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
11 SID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN bc Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not visible on screen and is hidden from the user. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
f SID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
a SID_FM_NEW 6f Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator.
12 HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 34 Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 84 Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ftableselectionpage%2Ftable 1c Specifies the desired table.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ftableselectionpage%2Fdatasource 3a Specifies the data source that contains the desired table.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fcontentfieldpage%2Fselectfield 3f Displays the data fields that are accepted into the form field.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fcontenttablepage%2Ftable 76 In the Table field, select the table containing the data field whose content should be displayed in the control field.
3e DBP_EDIT_RID_PAGE_LCW_CONTENTSELECTION_FIELD_ET_DISPLAYEDFIELD 4a Specifies the field whose data are to be shown in the combo or list boxes.
3e DBP_LISTBOX_RID_PAGE_LCW_CONTENTSELECTION_FIELD_LB_SELECTFIELD 3d Displays all table fields chosen on the previous Wizard page.
33 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldlinkpage%2Flisttable 5b Specifies the linked table data field, which is related to the specified value table field.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldlinkpage%2Fvaluefield 5d Specifies the current form data field which should be related to a field in the linked table.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FnoRadiobutton 7a Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form.
42 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FstoreInFieldCombobox 4b Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved.
3c modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FyesRadiobutton 6d Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 51 Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 76 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, which is where you can assign and organize Styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 4d Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 5d Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
1e .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRigh 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1e .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBotto 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 8a Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 54 Increases the left indent of the current paragraph and sets it to the next tab stop.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 156 Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlight Color icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlight Color icon again. To change the highlight color, click the arrow next to the Highlight Color icon, and then click the color that you want.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ab Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 5f Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 5f Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 71 Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 5b Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 99 Отвора алатник кој содржи функции за оптимизирање на редовите и колоните во табела.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 69 Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Rotates the selected object.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 2b Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 5b Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 65 Loads a document specified by a URL. You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered.
d .uno%3AReload 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
1c HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3d Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
b .uno%3AStop 5e Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 4a Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
17 HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 39 Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state.
14 HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 22 Applies the data to your document.
18 HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 21 Closes the dialog without saving.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 2b Opens the hyperlink at the cursor position.
18 HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
42 SVX%3AIMAGEBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
3b SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
36 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 41 Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses.
3e SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
43 SVX%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 19 Creates an FTP hyperlink.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2Fapply 3f Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
48 SVX%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
37 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 3f Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2Fclose 64 Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2FTreeListBox 48 Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to.
3f SVX%3ACHECKBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 3d Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
39 SVX_IMAGEBUTTON_RID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL_BTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
16 HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 67 Specifies the full URL of the addressee, in the form mailto:name@provider.com or news:group.server.com.
2e SVX_EDIT_RID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL_ED_SUBJECT 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
3a SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL_RB_LINKTYP_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f SVX%3AIMAGEBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
3b SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 SVX%3AIMAGEBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
42 SVX%3AIMAGEBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
44 SVX%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
42 SVX%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 72 Ја отвара избраната датотека од база на податоци за уредување.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c6 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name.. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 5b Closes the connection to the data source. See Tools - Options - Data sources - Connections.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4e Filters the records based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 51 Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
1f HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 6b Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Refreshes the displayed data.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fautoformat 79 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableformat 7e Opens the Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Frowonly 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastable 50 Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneleft 45 Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftablecols 3c Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallright 43 Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallleft 3e Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftabledbcols 42 Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneright 44 Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fcolumnname 5a Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fnumformat 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ffromdatabase 1d Accepts the database formats.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableheading 4d Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fparastyle 73 This is where you can select other Paragraph Styles to apply to the paragraph you want to insert into the document.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftextview 9f Lists the database columns that you selected to be inserted into the document. You can also enter text here. This text will be also inserted into the document.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftoedit 5d Moves the fields that you selected in the Database columns list box into the selection field.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftabletxtcols 47 Select the database columns that you want to insert it in the document.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fasfields 4f Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as fields.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastext 4d Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fvalue3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fcond3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Ffield3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fop3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 3a Specifies the sort order (either ascending or descending).
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbStartOver 77 Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbBackwards 63 Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForText 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FlbForm 46 Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForNull 39 Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbAllFields 1c Searches through all fields.
21 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2Fclose 5d Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FpbSearchAgain 1d Starts or cancels the search.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbWildCard 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FlbPosition 45 Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbUseFormat 57 Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSingleField 28 Searches through a specified data field.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbRegular 22 Searches with regular expressions.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForNotNull 36 Specifies that fields will be found that contain data.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbCase 53 Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 4d Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 3f Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 31 Runs the SQL query and displays the query result.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 3f Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fadd 25 Inserts the currently selected table.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fqueries 13 Shows only queries.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Ftables 12 Shows only tables.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fclose 1d Closes the Add Tables dialog.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Ftablelist 1b Lists the available tables.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 36 Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5c Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3f Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3f Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 8b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 8b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 86 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style from the already assigned styles.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 2f Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
10 SID_MODIFYSTATUS ac If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 1a Displays the current time.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 1a Displays the current date.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fedges 2f Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fheight 2b Defines the height of the individual tiles.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fwidth 2a Defines the width of the individual tiles.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 28 Displays the image as a charcoal sketch.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 59 Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 71 This icon on the Image bar opens the Image Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected picture.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 21 Softens the contrast in an image.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fagingdialog%2Fvalue 5a Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. The higher the value, the more the image ages.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 24 Removes single pixels from an image.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize 29 Opens a dialog for defining solarization.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2Fvalue 5b Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 23 Increases the contrast in an image.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia 2e Opens a dialog for setting the aging function.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fposterdialog%2Fvalue 43 Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2Finvert 45 Specifies whether the pixels to be solarized are also to be inverted.
f .uno%3AGrafMode a2 Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 51 Specifies the amount of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 53 Specifies the amount of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4b Specifies the amount of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 39 Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 3e Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 26 Opens a dialog to crop pixel graphics.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 57 Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 55 Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 51 Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4b With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 53 Opens the Flowcharts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 81 Opens the Fontwork dialog from which you can insert styled text not possible through standard font formatting into your document.
e .uno%3ADBLimit 4b Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query by the LIMIT X clause
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 74 Copies the formatting of the selected text or object and applies the formatting to another text selection or object.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fnondistinct 21 Not use distinct values in query.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fdistinct 1d Use distinct values in query.
3d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2FQueryPropertiesDialog 1d Use distinct values in query.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 4e Opens the Stars toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 56 Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontrol%2Factive a6 Полето за листа на самиот врв е каде што можете да изберете други модули на помош за %PRODUCTNAME.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fsearch 55 Го наоѓа следното појавување на бараниот поим.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fbackwards 63 Пребарува назад од тековната позиција на покажувачот.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fwrap a0 Ја пребарува целата Помошна страница, почнувајќи од тековната позиција на покажувачот.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontrol%2Ftabcontrol cd Навигацискиот панел на прозорецот од помошта содржи страници со јазичиња Содржина, Индекс, Најди и Обележувачи.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 56 Обезбедува краток преглед на Системот за помош
10 HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 7d Алатникот содржи важни функции за контролирање на Системот за помош
1a HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 4d Го сокрива и покажува навигацискиот панел
1d HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 47 Се враќа назад на претходната страница
1c HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 3a Оди напред на следната страница
1a HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 71 Се преместува на првата страница од тековниот наслов на Помош
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fmatchcase 50 Разликува меѓу текст со големи и мали букви.
1a HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 35 Ја печати тековната страница
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fwholewords 32 Наоѓа само целосни зборови.
21 HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 4f Го отвора дијалогот Најди на оваа страница.
1e HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 54 Ја додава оваа страница во вашите обележувачи
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fsearchterm aa Внесете го текстот за кој што сакате да пребарате или изберете елемент од текстот во листата.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpindexpage%2Fdisplay 4f Кликнете за да ја прикажете избраната тема.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpindexpage%2FHelpIndexPage 95 Двоен клик на елемент или напишете го зборот што сакате да го најдете во индексот.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fdisplay 4c Го прикажува елементот избран во листата.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fheadings 99 Одредува дали само да пребарува во заглавјата на документ за поимот за пребарување.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fcompletewords d3 Одредува дали да се изврши точно пребарување за зборот што го внесовте. Непотполните зборови нема да бидат најдени.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Ffind 93 Кликнете за да започне пребарувањето со целосен текст за поимот што го внесовте.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fresults 109 Ги прикажува заглавјата на страниците најдени во вашето пребарување со целосен текст. За да прикажете страница, двоен клик на нејзиниот елемент.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fsearch 9b Внесете го поимот за пребарување овде. Пребарувањето не разликува мали/големи букви.
19 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 3f го избришува избраниот обележувач
17 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 48 ја прикажува избраната тема од помошта.
19 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 63 отвора дијалог за внесување друго име за обележувачот
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpbookmarkpage%2FHelpBookmarkPage f9 Двојно кликање на обележувач и притискање на копчето Enter ја отвора доделената страница во помош. Десен клик го отвора контекстното мени.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Fbookmarkdialog%2FBookmarkDialog b4 Го прикажува името на обележаната страница. Исто така можете да напишете ново име за обележувачот.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontentpage%2FHelpContentPage b5 Ги прикажува главните теми од помошта, подредени на сличен начин како папки во менаџер на датотеки.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 4e Го отвора алатникот Боја на извлекувањето.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 58 Го отвора прозорецот Површина на извлекувањето.
38 svx%2Fui%2Fextrustiondepthdialog%2FExtrustionDepthDialog 3e Внесете длабочина на извлекување.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 60 Го накривува избраниот објект надолу за пет степени.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 60 Го накривува избраниот објект налево за пет степени.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 62 Го накривува избраниот објект надесно за пет степени.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 68 Ги вклучува и исклучува 3Д-ефектите за избраните објекти.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 60 Го накривува избраниот објект нагоре за пет степени.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 5e Го отвора прозорецот Осветлување на извлекувањето.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 50 Го отвора прозорецот Насока на извлекување.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 56 Го отвора прозорецот Длабочина на извлекување.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 1e Изберете насока.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 63 Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more.
14 HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 68 According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk.
12 HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
12 HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
20 HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 3b Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 34 Specifies that you want to create a personal letter.
1c HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 3d Specifies that you want to create a business letter template.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER 93 Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE1 45 Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter.
1d HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER 8a Specifies that your own address is imprinted in small size above the sender address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 81 Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area.
21 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 6e Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address.
13 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
13 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
19 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6f Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer.
17 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
18 HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
1e HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 66 Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE2 57 Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper.
17 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 29 Includes a footer on the letter template.
19 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Includes fold marks on the letter template.
1b HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
18 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 2f Includes a subject line on the letter template.
20 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Includes a small size return address on the letter template.
16 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4c Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template.
15 HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Includes a logo on the letter template.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE3 38 Defines the items to be included in the letter template.
1e HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 3e Address database fields are inserted into the letter template.
21 HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 48 Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Specifies the street address of the sender.
18 HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 21 Specifies the name of the sender.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 33 Use the address data from the following text boxes.
1c HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
1f HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 45 Use the address data from Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User data.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Specifies the sender and recipient information.
1f HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2e Includes page numbers in your letter template.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 30 Select to suppress the footer on the first page.
14 HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 24 Enter the text for the footer lines.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE5 39 Specifies the information to include in the footer space.
19 HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 31 Saves the template and keeps it open for editing.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 5c Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template.
1a HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2d Specifies the title of the document template.
12 HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
10 HID_LETTER_PAGE6 50 Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE b0 According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 8a The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK c8 Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 29 Creates a fax template for a private fax.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 30 Creates a fax template for a business-style fax.
d HID_FAX_PAGE1 27 Defines the style of your fax document.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 12 Includes a footer.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 16 Includes a date field.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 18 Includes a company logo.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 18 Includes a subject line.
d HID_FAX_PAGE2 29 Specifies the fax elements to be printed.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
d HID_FAX_PAGE3 3a Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 45 Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 76 Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 1e Enter the sender address data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 1e Enter the sender address data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 1e Enter the sender address data.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 1e Enter the sender address data.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 1e Enter the sender address data.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 1e Enter the sender address data.
d HID_FAX_PAGE4 1a Specifies the footer data.
d HID_FAX_PAGE5 27 Defines the template name and location.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 4d Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 29 Select the page design from the list box.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 27 Specifies a page design for the agenda.
2f SW%3AEDIT%3ADLG_WIZARD_AG%3ADLG_AG2_EDIT_METORT 26 Specifies the location of the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 23 Specifies the title of the meeting.
34 SW%3ATIMEFIELD%3ADLG_WIZARD_AG%3ADLG_AG2_TFLD_METTIM 22 Specifies the time of the meeting.
34 SW%3ADATEFIELD%3ADLG_WIZARD_AG%3ADLG_AG2_DFLD_METDAT 22 Specifies the date of the meeting.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3d Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 28 Specifies whether to print a Notes line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 2f Specifies whether to print a Please bring line.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 2e Specifies whether to print a Please read line.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 34 Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 3e Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 4b Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the resource persons.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 45 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the timekeeper.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 45 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the note taker.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 46 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facilitator.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 58 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 30 Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Moves the current topic row down.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 1f Moves the current topic row up.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1e Removes the current topic row.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 34 Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3a Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 53 Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 2a Specifies the name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5f Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 36 Choose the title and location for the agenda template.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 39 Click to create the form without answering further pages.
12 HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 28 Activates the Wizard for creating forms.
1a HID_DLGFORM_FIELDSSELECTED 2d Displays the fields that are in the new form.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
1b HID_DLGFORM_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
1b HID_DLGFORM_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
16 HID_DLGFORM_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
18 HID_DLGFORM_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
14 HID_DLGFORM_LBTABLES 42 Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
1d HID_DLGFORM_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 3d Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 35 Click to add a subform based on an existing relation.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 32 Select the relation on which the subform is based.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 18 Select to add a subform.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 3d Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 44 Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
19 HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 2d Aligns the database fields in a tabular form.
19 HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 47 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field.
1a HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 51 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields.
19 HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 1d The labels are right-aligned.
1b HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 31 Arranges the labels above the corresponding data.
18 HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 1c The labels are left-aligned.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 23 Select to disallow adding new data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 21 Select to disallow deleting data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 20 Select to disallow editing data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 4f Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 37 Creates a form that is only used for entering new data.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2b Specifies that the field borders look flat.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 30 Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 29 Specifies that the fields have no border.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 26 Specifies the page style for the form.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 3f Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 4a Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 1f Specifies the name of the form.
1b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilot 2a Activates the wizard for creating reports.
21 HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
1c HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 2e Click to transfer all fields to the right box.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 39 Click to transfer the selected field(s) to the right box.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
1e HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Displays all fields that are included in the new report.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 40 Select the table or query for which the report is to be created.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 54 Click to move a field from the right box to the left box, or double-click the field.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST b4 Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 54 Click to move a field from the left box to the right box, or double-click the field.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING c6 Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
1b HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
15 HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
15 HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 33 Select the first field by which to sort the report.
18 HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 33 Selects a portrait page orientation for the report.
19 HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 34 Selects a landscape page orientation for the report.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT 8a Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background.
1a HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 65 Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more.
1e HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 30 When you click Finish, the report will be saved.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 44 When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit.
1e HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 6f Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents.
1f HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 89 Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created.
15 HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 43 Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page.
2b SD%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3ABUT_NEXT 54 Creates new documents according to your selections and saves them on the hard drive.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FnextPageButton 36 Saves the current settings and moves to the next page.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FlastPageButton 34 Returns to the selections made on the previous page.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdesignsTreeview 1e Displays all existing designs.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FoldDesignRadiobutton 81 Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdelDesingButton 31 Deletes the selected design from the design list.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FnewDesignRadiobutton 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FURLEntry 6f Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FindexEntry 66 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FperlRadiobutton 3d Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FASPRadiobutton 99 When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FstandardRadiobutton 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
42 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FchgDefaultRadiobutton d4 The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FframesRadiobutton b2 Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FendlessCheckbutton 55 Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FcontentCheckbutton 27 Creates a title page for your document.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FCGIEntry 48 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FnotesCheckbutton 2d Specifies that your notes are also displayed.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FkioskRadiobutton 87 Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdurationSpinbutton 32 Defines the amount of time for each slide display.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FwebCastRadiobutton 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FchgAutoRadiobutton 8b The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FsldSoundCheckbutton 60 Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fresolution3Radiobutton 3a Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fresolution2Radiobutton 3d Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation.
43 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fresolution1Radiobutton 5f Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FjpgRadiobutton 25 The files are exported as JPEG files.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FgifRadiobutton 23 The files are exported as GIF files
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FpngRadiobutton 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FqualityCombobox 35 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2Fpage3 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
39 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FmiscTextview 36 Specifies additional text to appear on the title page.
35 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FwwwEntry 49 Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FemailEntry 1d Specifies the e-mail address.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FauthorEntry 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FtextOnlyCheckbutton 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FbackButton 56 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FvLinkButton 58 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation.
38 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FaLinkButton 57 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FlinkButton 55 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FtextButton 50 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FuserRadiobutton 43 Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects.
3f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdefaultRadiobutton 34 Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fpublishingdialog%2FdocColorsRadiobutton 43 Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document.
15 HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
40 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Fradiobuttons 46 Displays all option fields which have to be included in the group box.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Ftoright 4a Confirms the current label and copies the label to the Option fields list.
3a modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Ftoleft 31 Removes the selected option fields from the list.
3f modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Fradiolabels 6d Specifies the respective label for each option field. You will see the label of the option field in the form.
48 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefaultselectionno 49 Specifies that you do not want any option field to be the default choice.
47 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefselectionfield 53 Select the option field that you want to have as the default when opening the form.
49 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefaultselectionyes 5b Specifies that you want an option field to be selected as a default after opening the form.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionvaluespage%2Fradiobuttons 49 Select the option field for which you want to assign the reference value.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionvaluespage%2Foptionvalue 4d Select a number or a text as a reference value for the selected option field.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FnoRadiobutton 5f Specifies that you want to save the reference values in the form only, and not in the database.
42 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FstoreInFieldCombobox 45 Select the data field in which the reference values have to be saved.
3c modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FyesRadiobutton 43 Specifies that you want to save the reference values in a database.
33 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionsfinalpage%2Fnameit 66 Specifies the label for the option box. You will see the label of the group box displayed in the form.
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 56 Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted.
1d HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 5a Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
18 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 55 Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
17 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
25 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
1e HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
1e HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
21 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
17 HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 32 Displays the ranges to be converted from the list.
1c HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3c All currency cells in the active document will be converted.
1c HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3f All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted.
1c HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 36 All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted.
15 HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 97 If the current document is a $[officename] Calc document or template, you can call up the Euro Converter using the corresponding icon in the Tools bar.
15 HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 22 Activates the help for the dialog.
17 HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1a Closes the Euro Converter.
1b HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 4f Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files.
15 HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 16 Starts the conversion.
19 HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT bc Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password.
15 HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
14 HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6b Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.
1c HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 5b All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted.
18 HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1d Converts the entire document.
18 HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 32 Specifies the currency to be converted into euros.
17 HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 4b Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved.
17 HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 4b Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted.
1d HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 48 Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
1b HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 3b Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document.
1f HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 57 Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents.
13 HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 44 Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fgroupwise 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2FSelectTypePage 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
15 HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 14 Go to previous step.
30 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fother 60 Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename].
2e modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fkde 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
13 HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 32 Exits the wizard without implementing any changes.
36 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fthunderbird 50 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird or Icedove.
11 HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 10 Go to next step.
c slot%3A10934 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Ffirefox 4e Select this option if you already use an address book in Firefox or Iceweasel.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fmacosx 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fevolution 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fevoldap 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Finvokeadminpage%2Fsettings 3a Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Finvokeadminpage%2FInvokeAdminPage 5e Allows you to enter additional settings for LDAP address data and other external data sources.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttablepage%2Ftable 59 Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttablepage%2FSelectTablePage 78 Specifies a table from the Mozilla / Netscape 6.x address book source that is used as the address book in $[officename].
2f modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Fname 1f Specifies the data source name.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Favailable db Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Fbrowse 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2FDataSourcePage 81 Specifies a location for the address book file and a name under which the data source will be listed in the data source explorer.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldassignpage%2Fassign 34 Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldassignpage%2FFieldAssignPage 3f Opens a dialog that allows you to specify the field assignment.
5 34200 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
5 34209 1e Deletes the selected settings.
5 34207 7c Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "none".
5 34217 37 Enter the name of the author for the selected document.
5 34216 2e Enter a description for the selected document.
5 34215 88 Enter the title for the selected document. The title appears as a hyperlink to the selected document on the index page of your web site.
5 34218 44 Select the file format that you want to export the selected file to.
5 34212 28 Removes the selected file from the list.
5 34211 db Opens a dialog where you can select the files that you want to have to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site.
5 34210 f9 Lists the documents that you want to publish to your web site. The wizard can convert %PRODUCTNAME documents to HTML, PDF, or, in some cases, Flash format before the documents are uploaded. All other files are uploaded in their original file format.
5 34220 25 Select the layout for the index page.
5 34245 3d Optimizes the web site for a 800x600 pixel screen resolution.
5 34235 3b Includes the file names of the documents on the index page.
5 34236 44 Includes the summary information of the documents on the index page.
5 34237 4d Includes the names of the people who created the documents on the index page.
5 34238 3f Includes the creation dates of the documents on the index page.
5 34239 49 Includes the date of the last time a file was modified on the index page.
5 34240 33 Displays the format of the files on the index page.
5 34241 30 Displays the file format icon on the index page.
5 34242 3c Displays the number of pages in your site on the index page.
5 34243 36 Displays the file size in kilobytes on the index page.
5 34246 3e Optimizes the web site for a 1024x768 pixel screen resolution.
5 34244 3d Optimizes the web site for a 640x480 pixel screen resolution.
5 34249 54 Select the Icons that you want to use for the navigation elements on the index page.
5 34248 2d Select a Background image for the index page.
5 34247 2b Select the color scheme for the index page.
5 34292 30 Clears the background image from the index page.
5 34291 4e Opens a file open dialog to select a background image file for the index page.
5 34290 36 Specifies a background image for the Web Wizard style.
5 41002 28 Clears the icon set from the index page.
5 41000 54 Select an icon set for navigation on HTML presentations documents in the Web Wizard.
5 34258 57 Enter the e-mail address for the index page. The address is stored in an HTML meta tag.
5 34259 58 Enter the copyright notice for the index page. The notice is stored in an HTML meta tag.
5 34256 53 Enter the modified date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
5 34255 53 Enter the creation date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
5 34253 56 Enter a description for the index page. The description is stored in an HTML meta tag.
5 34250 5f Enter the title for the index page. This element is displayed on the title bar of web browsers.
5 34271 25 Enter the name for the settings file.
5 34268 c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
5 34266 46 Opens a dialog where you can specify the location of the archive file.
5 34265 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
5 34270 35 Saves the settings that you specified in this wizard.
5 34269 67 Opens the FTP Connection dialog where you can edit and test the connection settings for the FTP server.
5 34263 22 Opens a dialog to select a folder.
5 34261 d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
5 34260 48 Opens your web page in the default web browser of your operating system.
5 41046 51 Opens a dialog where you can specify the FTP server directory to store the files.
5 41045 57 Enter the location of a directory on the FTP server where you want to store your files.
5 41044 33 Tests the FTP connection with the current settings.
5 41043 3d Enter the password that is required to access the FTP server.
5 41042 3e Enter the user name that is required to access the FTP server.
5 41041 2f Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server.
5 41040 44 Edit and test the FTP server connection settings for the Web Wizard.
17 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 9a The Parameter Input dialog asks the user to enter the parameter values. Enter a value for each query parameter and confirm by clicking OK or typing Enter.
13 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 51 Specifies the criteria by which the content of the data field should be filtered.
11 HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 50 Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations.
1d HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 16 Edit Joint Properties.
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 66 If you click the cell, you can select among the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsavedialog%2Fschema 49 Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view.
22 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsavedialog%2Ftitle 2a Enter the name of the query or table view.
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 8d Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in a query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels.
12 HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 26 Select conditions to define the query.
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 7c Enter the name of the data field that you referred to in the Query. All settings made in the lower rows refer to this field.
14 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 4b The corresponding database table of the selected data field is listed here.
16 HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 5a If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visible in the query
21 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjoindialog%2Ftype 54 For a full join, the results table contains all fields of the left and right tables.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjoindialog%2Ftable2 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
5 dummy 5a If you click More, a dialog displaying more information about the current problem appears.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirmpassword 1d Enter the new password again.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fnewpassword 17 Enter the new password.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Foldpassword 17 Enter the old password.
29 SFX2%3AEDIT%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_USER 23 Specifies the name of the new user.
1c HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 14 Displays help texts.
16 HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 84 Specifies the name of the data field. Note the database restrictions, such as the length of the name, special characters and spaces.
12 HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 2a This button opens the Field Format dialog.
16 HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 19 Specifies the field type.
d .uno%3ADelete 19 Deletes the selected row.
1a SID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 96 Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has been saved.
18 HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 32 This area is where you define the table structure.
19 HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 22 Specifies an optional description.
13 HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 3c Specifies the value that is the default in new data records.
20 SID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 4f If this command has a check mark, the data field in this line is a primary key.
19 HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 41 Displays the format code that you can select with the ... button.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_RESET 50 Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started.
2e dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FINDEX_LIST 46 Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_RENAME 1a Renames the current index.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_NEW 14 Creates a new index.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_DROP 1a Deletes the current index.
23 HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1a Determines the sort order.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FUNIQUE 3e Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Findexdesigndialog%2FID_INDEX_SAVE 2b Saves the current index in the data source.
1f HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 54 Displays the a list fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.
13 HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 57 Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdeldefault 60 If you delete the corresponding primary key, a set value will be set to all external key fields.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 3c Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Ftable2 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fjoindialog%2Frelations 28 Defines the key fields for the relation.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdelaction 63 Specifies that the deletion of a primary key will not have any effect on other external key fields.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Faddcascade 77 Updates all the external key fields if the value of the corresponding primary key has been modified (Cascading Update).
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Faddnull a1 If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set the "IS NULL" value to all external key fields. IS NULL means that the field is empty.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Faddaction 5a Specifies that any change made to a primary key does not affect other external key fields.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fadddefault 76 If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set a default value to all external key fields.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdelcascade 69 Specifies that all external key fields will be deleted if you delete the corresponding primary key field.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Frelationdialog%2Fdelnull 6d If you delete the corresponding primary key, the "IS NULL" value will be assigned to all external key fields.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fprimarykey 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fdata 74 If the data cannot be attached, you will see a list of fields in the Column Info dialog whose data cannot be copied.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fview b4 If the database supports Views, you can select this option only when a query is copied in a table container. This option enables you to see and edit a query as a normal table view.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fkeyname 46 Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fdef 40 Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fdefdata 29 Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcopytablepage%2Fname 1e Specifies a name for the copy.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fapplycolpage%2Fcolrh 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
21 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fapplycolpage%2Fto 3e Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fapplycolpage%2Ffrom b8 Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
25 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftypeselectpage%2Fauto 40 Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition.
18 HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 2c Select the default value for a Yes/No field.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftypeselectpage%2Fautobutton 23 Enables automatic type recognition.
11 HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 7a Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields.
f HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
10 HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 14 Select a field type.
16 HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftypeselectpage%2Fcolumnnames 43 Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fnone 2a Clears all of the check boxes in the list.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fdown_right 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fup_right 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fall 2b Selects all of the data fields in the list.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fright a0 Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fnamematchingpage%2Fleft 168 Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, select the check box in front of the data field name. To map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow.
2e dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fusesql92 89 Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneratedvaluespage%2Fquery 63 Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field.
2f dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneratedvaluespage%2Fstatement 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
16 HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b2 Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBase driver, leave this check box clear.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fgeneratedvaluespage%2Fautoretrieve 67 Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source.
18 HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET_ODBC 79 Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database.
22 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fodbcpage%2Foptions 56 Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbasepage%2FindiciesButton 61 Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBase database.
32 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbasepage%2FshowDelRowsCheckbutton 7f Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Fremoveall 38 Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Faddall 38 Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Fadd 33 Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Ffreeindex 3b Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Ftableindex 3a Lists the current indexes for the selected database table.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Fremove 3a Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2Ftable 31 Select the database table that you want to index.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbaseindexdialog%2FDBaseIndexDialog 29 Lets you organize dBase database indexes.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fstatus 48 Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsqlhistory 6a Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run.
25 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsql 3a Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fexecute 40 Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2FDirectSQLDialog 4f Opens a dialog where you can enter an SQL command for administering a database.
1e HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 5b Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fuseradminpage%2Fdelete 1a Removes the selected user.
25 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fuseradminpage%2Ftable 4c Displays and lets you edit the database access rights for the selected user.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fuseradminpage%2Fchangepass 3d Changes the current user password for accessing the database.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fuseradminpage%2Fadd 34 Adds a new user for accessing the selected database.
24 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fuseradminpage%2Fuser 32 Select the user whose settings you want to modify.
33 DBACCESS_PUSHBUTTON_TAB_PAG_ADABAS_SETTINGS_PB_STAT 5e Opens the Database Statistics dialog, where you can view statistics about the Adabas database.
33 DBACCESS_CHECKBOX_TAB_PAG_ADABAS_SETTINGS_CB_SHUTDB 3d Exits the Adabas database server when you exit $[officename].
35 DBACCESS_EDIT_TAB_PAG_ADABAS_SETTINGS_ET_CTRLPASSWORD 27 Enter the password of the Control User.
35 DBACCESS_EDIT_TAB_PAG_ADABAS_SETTINGS_ET_CTRLUSERNAME 69 Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database.
3f DBACCESS_NUMERICFIELD_TAB_PAG_ADABAS_SETTINGS_NF_DATA_INCREMENT 6f Enter the size by which you want to automatically increment the database. The maximum increment size is 100 MB.
3b DBACCESS_NUMERICFIELD_TAB_PAG_ADABAS_SETTINGS_NF_CACHE_SIZE 33 Enter the size of the data buffer for the database.
33 DBACCESS_NUMERICFIELD_DLG_ADABASSTAT_ET_MEMORYUSING 42 Displays the amount of used space in the database as a percentage.
28 DBACCESS_EDIT_DLG_ADABASSTAT_ET_FREESIZE 53 Displays the amount of free space (in megabytes) that is available in the database.
24 DBACCESS_EDIT_DLG_ADABASSTAT_ET_SIZE 36 Displays the full size (in megabytes) of the database.
2b DBACCESS_LISTBOX_DLG_ADABASSTAT_LB_DATADEVS 38 Displays the path and the name of the DATADEVSPACE file.
2e DBACCESS_EDIT_DLG_ADABASSTAT_ET_TRANSACTIONLOG 3a Displays the path and the name of the TRANSACTIONLOG file.
2b DBACCESS_EDIT_DLG_ADABASSTAT_ET_SYSDEVSPACE 37 Displays the path and the name of the SYSDEVSPACE file.
19 HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 2e Enter the size of the data cache in megabytes.
20 HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 4d Enter the size of the database in megabytes here. The maximum size is 100 MB.
15 HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 1e Type the name of the database.
15 HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR cb Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database. Normally, the default settings for the name and the password of the control user are not changed.
12 HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR a1 Enter the name of the domain user that is used by Adabas internally. Normally, the default settings for the name and password of the domain user are not changed.
18 HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD 11 Enter a password.
15 HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 2d Enter the name of the database administrator.
1a HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 27 Enter the path for the system DEVSPACE.
22 HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 34 Enter the size of the transaction file in megabytes.
1d HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 2c Enter the path for the transaction log file.
1b HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 25 Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE.
1d HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fprimarykeys 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
34 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fignorecurrency a9 Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3b Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Finputchecks d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseas 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fappend 39 Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements.
35 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseodbcliterals 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseoj 5c Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fignoreprivs 43 Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Feol 6d Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems).
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Freplaceparams 44 Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?).
34 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fusecatalogname b7 Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBase driver.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fdisplayver 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fuseschemaname 37 Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fspecialsettingspage%2Fcreateindex 2d Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 54 Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 38 Select the type of database that you want to connect to.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FpassCheckbutton 3b Enter the password that is required to access the database.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 3c Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 4e Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 38 Enter the path to the text files that the database uses.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 49 Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FconnectionButton 38 Tests the database connection with the current settings.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3e Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 57 The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 49 Select to create a database document for an existing database connection.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 3e Select the database type for the existing database connection.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST 86 Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC 62 Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT a6 Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 20 Select to create a new database.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fopenediting 4f Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fnoregister 4e Select to keep the database information only within the created database file.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fusewizard 46 Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished.
2d dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2Fyesregister 11d Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Field - More Fields) or in a mail merge.
2b dbaccess%2Fui%2Ffinalpagewizard%2FPageFinal 6a Specifies whether you want to register the database, open the database for editing, or insert a new table.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 28 Specifies the path to the database file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
3e dbaccess%2Fui%2Fauthentificationpage%2FpassRequiredCheckbutton 2b A password must contain 3 to 18 characters.
3b dbaccess%2Fui%2Fauthentificationpage%2FgeneralUserNameEntry 30 A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 2a Click to open a database selection dialog.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 1a Enter the data source URL.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 1d Open a path selection dialog.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 28 Enter the path to the dBase *.dbf files.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FjavaDriverLabel 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
1c HID_DSADMIN_CONNURL_JDBCPAGE df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 41 hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database.
17 HID_DSADMIN_USESSL_LDAP 56 Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
1b HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
17 HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
19 HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizmysqlintropage%2Fjdbc 48 Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizmysqlintropage%2Fodbc 48 Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 33 Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog:
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 24 Enter the path to the database file.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fconnectionpage%2FjavaDriverLabel 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 2e Enter the port number for the database server.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 26 Enter the URL for the database server.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 26 Enter the name of the Oracle database.
37 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdbwizspreadsheetpage%2Fpasswordrequired 44 Select to request a password from the user of the database document.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
1f HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 87 Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000).
1d HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 81 Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5).
1b HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 4a Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file.
1a HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 4c Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 1a Click to access txt files.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 1a Click to access csv files.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE fd Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 25 Opens the Advanced Properties dialog.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 5e Opens the Database Properties dialog where you can specify settings for the selected database.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 6a Opens the Connection Type Wizard which helps you to open a database file that is in an unsupported format.
18 HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 3e Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
f .uno%3ADBRename 71 Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 32 Opens the selected object in the last saved state.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView cf Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 86 Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail fe Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2Fok 2e Click to save the form into the database file.
34 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FfileNameEntry 27 Enter the file name for the saved form.
2f dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FupButton 31 Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy.
36 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FnewFolderButton 36 Click to create a new folder within the database file.
35 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fcollectionviewdialog%2FCollectionView 36 Click to create a new folder within the database file.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 1d Opens a new view in SQL mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 20 Opens a new view in design mode.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 44 Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 1e Opens a new query in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 21 Opens a new query in design mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, view, or query.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 27 Opens a new text document in form mode.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 38 Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesfilterpage%2FTablesFilterPage 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 4b Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 5d Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Refreshes the tables.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 43 Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view.
d .uno%3ADBSort 10 Opens a submenu.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 45 Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 47 Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 47 Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 10 Opens a submenu.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 2c Disables the preview in the database window.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 49 The preview window displays the document information of a form or report.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 36 The preview displays the document of a form or report.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsummarypage%2Ftextview 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
23 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fbackuppage%2Fbrowse c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fbackuppage%2FBackupPage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fmigratepage%2FMigratePage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fsummarypage%2FSummaryPage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fprepagepage%2FPreparePage 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD 99 Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 31 Enter the password to connect to the data source.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 32 Enter the user name to connect to the data source.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 36 The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 39 Specifies the table for which the query is to be created.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 39 Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 45 Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 47 Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 24 Select the condition for the filter.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 24 Select the condition for the filter.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 24 Select the condition for the filter.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 21 Removes the last row of controls.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 1e Appends a new row of controls.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 1e Select the numeric field name.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 33 Select to show only results of aggregate functions.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1e Select the aggregate function.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 46 Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 44 Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 23 Enter the alias for the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 20 Displays a summary of the query.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 31 Select to save the query and open it for editing.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 25 Select to save and display the query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1c Enter the name of the query.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Ftime 94 Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Fdate 94 Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed.
39 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2FDateTimeDialog 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction a9 In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
36 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Falignment 9 Alignment
37 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fbottompage 17 Bottom of Page (Footer)
34 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Ftoppage 14 Top of Page (Header)
32 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagen 6 Page N
35 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagenofm b Page N of M
3d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2FPageNumberDialog 5d You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN f Vert. Alignment
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 53 Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
2d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fkeep 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fdelete 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
31 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Finterval 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
35 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2FFloatingSort b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
30 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fsorting 19 Select the sorting order.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Ffooter 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
2c modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fbox 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fheader 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
2b modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fup 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
2e modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fgroup 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
2d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Ffloatingsort%2Fdown 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 36 The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new table.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES a2 Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 3e Select the private category to see only private sample tables.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 40 Select the business category to see only business sample tables.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 53 If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 2c If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 2c Remove the selected field from the list box.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 25 Add a new data field to the list box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 36 Select a field in order to edit the field information.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 4d Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 47 Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED aa Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 16 Select the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 41 Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY cd Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD 83 Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 41 Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 52 Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas)
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 29 Select to save and edit the table design.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 54 Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs)
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 19 Specifies the table name.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 44 Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 1a Renames the selected form.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 1a Deletes the selected form.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1c Renames the selected report.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 43 Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 39 Opens the selected table so you can change the structure.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 43 Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1b Renames the selected table.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1b Deletes the selected table.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 39 Opens the selected query so you can change the structure.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 35 Opens the selected form so you can change the layout.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1c Deletes the selected report.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 1b Deletes the selected query.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 37 Opens the selected report so you can change the layout.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 1b Renames the selected query.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 42 Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
c FontWork2TBO 75 Внесете ја вредноста за растојанието на знаците од ТекстЕфекти.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 71 Го отвора прозорецот за Растојание на знаците од ТекстЕфекти.
c FontWork1TBO 91 Кликнете за да го примените порамнувањето на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 5a Го отвора прозорецот Порамнување на ТекстЕфекти.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights c8 Ја менува висината на буквите на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти од нормална на иста висина за сите објекти.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes ee Го отвора алатникот Облик на ТекстЕфекти. Кликнете на некој од облиците за да го примените на сите избрани објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
30 fps%2Fui%2Fremotefilesdialog%2FRemoteFilesDialog 1f Remote Files Service User Guide
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepallothers 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepallmine 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepother 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepmine 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2FConflictsDialog 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2Fshare dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2FShareDocumentDialog 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit c3 Ако кликнете на копчето Затвори на лентата со алатки Филтер на формулари формуларот е прикажан без филтер.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute e7 Ако кликнете на Примени филтри базирани на формулари иконата на Филтер за формулари лентата со алатки, ќе се примени филтерот.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnewtoolbardialog%2FNewToolbarDialog 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
19 SID_FM_FILTER_IS_NOT_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
14 HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 2bd Условите за филтри кои се поставени се појавуваат во Навигатор за филтри. По поставувањето на филтерот, ќе видите празен запис на крајот од Навигатор за филтри . Можете да го изберете овој запис со кликање на зборот "Или". По избирањето на празниот запис, можете да внесете додатни услови за филтри во формуларот. Овие услови се поврзани со Логичко ИЛИ со претходно дефинираните услови.
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator de За да поврзете неколку услови за филтрирање со Логичко ИЛИ кликнете на иконата Навигација на филтри на лентата со филтри.
2f svx%2Fui%2Ffontworkgallerydialog%2FctlFavorites bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
38 svx%2Fui%2Ffontworkgallerydialog%2FFontworkGalleryDialog bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 96 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Image Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type.
1c .uno%3APreviousTrackedChange 41 Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any.
18 .uno%3ANextTrackedChange 3d Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fopen_all 35 The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Ftemplates_all 3c The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fmath_all 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 47 Click an icon on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fhelp 47 Click an icon on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fcalc_all 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fimpress_all 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fdatabase_all 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fextensions 47 Click an icon on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fdraw_all 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2FStartCenter 47 Click an icon on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fall_recent 47 Click an icon on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fwriter_all 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
c .uno%3AAbout a2 Прикажува општи информации за програмата како што се број на верзијата и авторски права.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense d3 Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into LibreOffice) or LibreOffice since 2010-09-28.
13 .uno%3AOnlineUpdate ee Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in Tools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite.
13 .uno%3ASendFeedback 4f Opens a feedback form in the web browser, where users can report software bugs.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 88 Ја отвора главната страница на помошта за $[officename] за активната апликација.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu ac Менито за помош Ви овозможува да го стартувате и да управувате со системот за помош на $[officename].
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 99 Овозможува проширени совети под покажувачот на глушецот сѐ до следното кликнување.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 76 Стандардниот алатник е достапен во секоја апликација од $[officename].
12 .uno%3ATableDesign 43 Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to format the table.
11 HID_TABLE_TOOLBOX f7 Алатникот за табели содржи функции што Ви се потребни кога работите со табели. Се појавува кога ќе го придвижите покажувачот во табела.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns b0 Ги вметнува сите полиња од означениот запис во тековниот документ на позицијата на покажувачот.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 1f Креира нов запис.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 5b Брише запис. Треба да биде потврдено пред бришење.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 53 Ви овозможува да отповикате внес на податоци.
e .uno%3ARecSave 91 Зачувува нов запис со податоци. Промената е регистрирана во базата на податоци.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 2f Ве носи на следниот запис.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 33 Ве носи на последниот запис.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 2b Ве носи на првиот запис.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 35 Ве носи на претходниот запис.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord a1 Го прикажува бројот на тековниот запис. Внесете број за да отидете на соодветниот запис.
e .uno%3AGridUse 87 Одредува дека може да поместувате објекти само помеѓу точките од мрежата.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX bd Алатникот за уредување точки се појавува кога ќе изберете полигон (објект) и ќе кликнете на Уреди точки.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 5c Активира режим во кој можете да поместувате точки.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 93 Го активира режимот за вметнување. Овој режим Ви овозможува да вметнувате точки.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete 145 Користете ја иконата Избриши точки за да избришете една или повеќе избрани точки. Ако сакате да изберете повеќе точки, кликнете ги соодветните точки додека го држите копчето Shift.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 108 Иконата Раздели крива ја разделува кривата. Изберете ја точката или точките каде што сакате да ја разделите кривата и потоа кликнете на иконата.
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 6d Ја означува тековната точка или избраните точки за бришење.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 7f Оваа икона претвора аголна точка или мазна точка во симетрична точка.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 79 Претвора крива во права линија или претвора права линија во крива.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 63 Ја претвора избраната точка или точки во аголни точки.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 6b Претвора аголна точка или симетрична точка во мазна точка.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 2e Затвора линија или крива.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 4e Inserts a chart based on data from a cell or table range or with default data.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 80 This submenu contains form controls like a textbox, checkbox, option button, and listbox that can be inserted into the document.
15 .uno%3AShapesLineMenu 49 This submenu contains straight, freeform, curved and polygon line shapes.
11 .uno%3AShapesMenu ae This submenu contains common shapes like a line, circle, triangle, and square, or a symbol shape like a smiley face, heart, and flower that can be inserted into the document.
16 HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 38 Изберете елемент за уредување.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 93 Оваа наредба отвора дијалог за приспособување на програмата кон вашите потреби.
13 SID_GENERAL_OPTIONS 18d Користете го овој дијалог за да креирате општи поставувања за работење во $[officename]. Информацијата покрива теми како што се податоци на корисникот, зачувување, печатење патеки до важни датотеки и папки и стандардни бои.
1c cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffax 4d Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот број на факс.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fposition 63 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата позиција во компанијата.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fhome 63 Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот домашен телефонски број.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2FOptUserPage 8c Користете ја оваа страница за да внесете или уредите податоци за корисникот.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcompany 59 Во ова поле впишете го името на Вашата компанија.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fwork 66 Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот телефонски број на работа.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ftitle 43 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата титула.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffirstname 28 Впишете го Вашето име.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fshortname 34 Впишете ги Вашите иницијали.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Femail 44 Впишете ја вашата е-поштенска адреса.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Flastname 30 Впишете го Вашето презиме.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstreet 48 Во ова поле впишете го името на улицата.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fizip 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ficity 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstate 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fsaveas 16a Одредува дека документите од типот избран на левата страна секогаш ќе се зачувуваат како датотеки од овој тип. Може да изберете друг тип датотека за тековниот документ во дијалогот Зачувување како.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdoctype ab Го одредува типот на документ за кој сакате да го дефинирате стандардниот формат на датотека.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Falienwarndialog%2Fask 16f Може да изберете дали да добиете порака за предупредување кога зачувувате документ во формат којшто не е OpenDocument или ако не сте поставиле стандарден формат во Алатки - Опции - Вчитање/зачувување - Општо.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fwarnalienformat 16f Може да изберете дали да добиете порака за предупредување кога зачувувате документ во формат којшто не е OpenDocument или ако не сте поставиле стандарден формат во Алатки - Опции - Вчитање/зачувување - Општо.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fodfversion fc Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_settings bd Поставувањата специфични за корисникот што се зачувани во документот, ги вчитува заедно со документот.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage ef Во делот Општо може да изберете стандардни поставувања за зачувување документи и може да изберете стандардни формати на датотеки.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fbackup 1ae Ја зачувува претходната верзија на документот како резервна копија секој пат кога ќе го зачувате документот. Секогаш кога %PRODUCTNAME креира резервна копија, претходната резервна копија се заменува. Резервната копија ја има наставката .BAK.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave_spin 8f Го одредува временскиот интервал во минути за опцијата за автоматско враќање.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_docprinter 16c If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdocinfo be Означува дека дијалогот Својства ќе се појавува секој пат кога ќе ја активирате наредбата Зачувај како.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fuserautosave 8d Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves all open documents when saving auto recovery information. Uses the same time interval as AutoRecovery does.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_fsys 97 Обележете го полето за да имате релативно зачувување на URL-а во датотечниот систем.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave 154 Одредува дека %PRODUCTNAME ја зачувува информацијата потребна за обновување на сите отворени документи во случај на пад на програмата. Може да го зададете временскиот интервал на зачувување.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_inet 84 Обележете го полето за да имате релативно зачувување на URL-а на Интернет.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fedit 84 Кликнете за да го прикажете дијалогот Избирање патека или Уреди патеки .
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fdefault bd Копчето Стандардно ги ресетира патеките на претходно дефинираните вредности за сите избрани елементи.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fpaths 65 To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2FOptPathsPage 75 This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fadd d6 Го отвора дијалогот Избирање патеки за да изберете друга папка или дијалогот Отворање за да изберете друга датотека.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fpaths bb Содржи листа на патеки или што веќе биле додадени. Означете ја стандардната патека за новите датотеки.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptionsedit 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsdelete 98 Го брише избраниот речник по потврдата, доколку истиот не е заштитен од запишување.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fdelete 64 Го брише означениот збор од тековниот сопствен речник.
2c cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fnewreplace a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Freplace a6 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2FOptLinguPage 9a Ги одредува својствата на проверката на правопис, тезаурус и разделувањето зборови.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodules 49 Ги содржи инсталираните јазични модули.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fbreaknumberoptions%2FBreakNumberOption 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 8e Автоматски го проверува правописот додека пишувате и ги подвлекува грешките.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fword 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fnameedit 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodulesedit 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fbook 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptions 7a Ги дефинира опциите за проверка на правопис и разделување зборови.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsedit 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsnew 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Flanguage 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Flang 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fexcept 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fback 74 Кликнете тука за да ги отповикате тековните промени во листата.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fdown 79 Го намалува за едно ниво приоритетот на модулот избран во листата.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fup 7b Го зголемува за едно ниво приоритетот на модулот избран во листата.
27 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Flanguage 39 Го одредува јазикот на модулот.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Flingudicts dc Ги одредува јазикот и достапните проверка на правопис, разделување зборови и подмодули со тезауруси за избраниот модул.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fhex_custom 3d The color code of the color expressed as a hexadecimal value.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FColorPage 60 Allows you to select a color from a color palette, edit an existing color, or define new colors.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Frecentcolorset 35 Displays the last twelve colors selected and applied.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fpaletteselector 52 Specifies the name of a selected palette. You can select a different palette here.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fnewpreview 71 Displays a preview of the color selected from the color palette and the changes you make with the controls below.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FR_custom 58 The color code of the red component of the color. Possible values are between 0 and 255.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fcolorset 57 Contains a list of available colors. Click on the desired one in the list to select it.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FG_custom 5a The color code of the green component of the color. Possible values are between 0 and 255.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fadd 29 Adds the new color to the Custom palette.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fdelete 30 Deletes the selected color without confirmation.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2FB_custom 59 The color code of the blue component of the color. Possible values are between 0 and 255.
32 SVTOOLS%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 55 Ја поставува осветленоста во моделот на бои HSB.
33 SVTOOLS%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 55 Го поставува заситувањето во моделот на бои HSB.
26 SVTOOLS_METRICFIELD_DLG_COLOR_NUM_CYAN 8b Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „цијан“ (сино-зелена) во моделот на бои CMYK.
2d SVTOOLS%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 6a Ја поставува вредноста за сината боја во моделот на бои RGB.
28 SVTOOLS%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 146 Кликнете на копчето <-- за да ја замените избраната боја во палетата со бои со бојата избрана од десната страна. Копчето е овозможено кога ќе изберете боја во еден од четирите агли.
2c SVTOOLS%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 6e Ја поставува вредноста за црвената боја во моделот на бои RGB.
28 SVTOOLS_METRICFIELD_DLG_COLOR_NUM_YELLOW 6d Ја поставува вредноста за жолтата боја во моделот на бои CMYK.
28 SVTOOLS%3APUSHBUTTON%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 145 Го поставува малиот покажувач за избор во десниот прозорец на бојата што одговара на избраната боја во левиот прозорец и ги ажурира соодветните вредности во нумеричките полиња.
29 SVTOOLS_METRICFIELD_DLG_COLOR_NUM_MAGENTA 8a Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „магента“ (пурпурна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
25 SVTOOLS_METRICFIELD_DLG_COLOR_NUM_KEY 8a Ја поставува вредноста за црната боја или клучот (црна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
2e SVTOOLS%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 6e Ја поставува вредноста за зелената боја во моделот на бои RGB.
2c SVTOOLS%3ANUMERICFIELD%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 4f Ја поставува нијансата во моделот на бои HSB.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fyear 97 Го дефинира опсегот на датуми, во кој системот ги препознава годините со две цифри.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fdocstatus 6d Одредува дали печатењето на документот се смета за промена.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fcollectusageinfo 4f Send usage data to help The Document Foundation improve the software usability.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ffiledlg 10d Одредува дали се користат дијалозите на $[officename] за отворање и зачувување на документи. Во спротивно се користат дијалозите на оперативниот систем.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fexthelp c7 Прикажува текст за помош кога ќе застанете со покажувачот над икона, наредба од мени или контрола од дијалог.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 4f Ги одредува општите поставувања на $[officename].
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontheight 7a Изберете големина на фонт за приказот на изворни кодови на HTML и Basic.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontname 69 Изберете го фонтот за приказ на изворни кодови на HTML и Basic.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fdelete 35 Ја брише замената на фонтови.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fapply 35 Ја прави замената на фонтови.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont2 43 Внесете го името на фонтот за замена.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont1 78 Внесете или изберете го името на фонтот што сакате да го замените.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fchecklb 1cf Ги прикажува оригиналниот фонт и фонтот што ќе го замени. Изберете Секогаш за да ги замените и екранскиот фонт и фонтот за печатење, дури и ако оригиналниот фонт е инсталиран на Вашиот систем. Изберете Само на екран за да го замените само екранскиот фонт.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fusetable 83 Ги овозможува поставувањата за замена на фонтови што сте ги дефинирале.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fnonpropfontonly a1 Обележете го ова за да ги прикажете само непропорционалните фонтови во листата Фонтови.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Freplacements 161 Заменува еден фонт со друг фонт по Ваш избор. Замената само менува фонт кога е прикажан на екранот или за време на печатење. Не го менува фонтот што е зададен во форматирањето на Вашиот документ.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseopengl 97 Use the high performance Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) to render all visual elements of the application, including windows, menus, toolbars and icons.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseaa af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Ficonsize 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseaccel 63 Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fsidebariconsize 2c Specifies the display size of sidebar icons.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fshowfontpreview 7b Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fnotebookbariconsize 31 Specifies the display size of notebook bar icons.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Ficonstyle 3b Specifies the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
5 20201 94 Притиснете Shift+Ctrl+R за да го обновите или освежите приказот на тековниот документ.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fforceopengl 44 Forces the use of OpenGL even if the graphics device is blacklisted.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Faafont 2f Select to smooth the screen appearance of text.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Faanf 33 Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmenuicons a4 Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmousepos 52 Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmousemiddle 30 Defines the function of the middle mouse button.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstep 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpapersize 58 Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2FOptPrintPage 3b Ги одредува опциите за печатење.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegrad 44 If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fframe2 35 Defines which warnings appear before printing begins.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradcolor 49 Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ffile c7 Одредува дали поставувањата за печатење се однесуваат на директното печатење или на печатењето во датотека.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetrans 135 Доколку го означите ова поле проѕирните објекти ќе бидат испечатени како и нормалните непроѕирни објекти, во зависност од вашиот избор во наредните две полиња за избор.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpaperorient 5e Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransnone 2f With this option transparency is never printed.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapdpi 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransauto 76 Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ftrans 69 Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fconverttogray 38 Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
2d sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapoptimal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmap 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmaptrans 75 If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fobjecttime 4d Specifies the time that each image remains in the cache in hours and minutes.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fobjectcache 64 Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Folecache 79 Изберете го максималниот број на OLE-објекти што се чуваат во кешот.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fgraphiccache 2e Specifies the total cache size for all images.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2FOptMemoryPage 43 This tab page lets you define various settings for the image cache.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorconfig 68 Ги избира боите за елементите на корисничкиот интерфејс.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fdelete af Ја брише шемата на бои што е прикажана во полето Шема. Не може да ја избришете стандардната шема.
23 HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 34 Внесете име за шемата за бои.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fsave a9 Ги зачувува тековните поставувања како шема на бои која може подоцна да ја вчитате повторно.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorschemelb 5c Ја избира шемата на бои што сакате да ја користите.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2FOptAppearancePage 67 Ги поставува боите за корисничкиот интерфејс на $[officename].
38 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fsystempagepreviewcolor af Ги применува поставувањата на оперативниот систем за висок контраст на прегледите на страници.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautofontcolor da Ги прикажува фонтовите во %PRODUCTNAME преку поставувањата на системските бои. Оваа опција влијае само на екранскиот приказ.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautodetecthc c4 %PRODUCTNAME се префрла во режим на висок контраст кога бојата на подлогата на оперативниот систем е многу темна.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedtext 7a Прегледува анимиран текст како што е трепкање и движење, во %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedgraphics 77 Ги прегледува анимираните графики, како што се GIF-слики во %PRODUCTNAME.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftextselinreadonly 6e Го прикажува покажувачот во документи што се само за читање.
36 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2FOptAccessibilityPage 104 Поставува опции коишто ги прават програмите на %PRODUCTNAME попристапни за корисници со намален вид, ограничена способност или други ограничувања.
28 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_SSO_CB_PASSWORD f3 Кога го користите методот за проверка на автентичност „едноставен“, обележете го ова поле за да ја направите Вашата лозинка трајна.
24 SVX_EDIT_RID_SVXPAGE_SSO_ED_PASSWORD ea Кога го користите методот за проверка на автентичност „едноставен“, тука внесете ја Вашата лозинка за пристап кон LDAP-серверот.
24 SVX_EDIT_RID_SVXPAGE_SSO_ED_USERNAME e5 Кога го користите методот за проверка на автентичност „едноставен“, тука го внесувате Вашето корисничко име на LDAP-серверот.
28 SVX_LISTBOX_RID_SVXPAGE_SSO_LB_MECHANISM 7e Изберете го Вашиот безбедносен механизам за пристап кон LDAP-серверот.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage 25 Specifies general Load/Save settings.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fnoproxy a8 Ги одредува имињата на серверите за кои не се потребни прокси-сервери, разделени со запирки.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftp 4d Напишете го името на прокси-серверот за FTP.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttps 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftpport 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttp 4e Напишете го името на прокси-серверот за HTTP.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fproxymode 4d Го одредува типот на дефиниција на прокси.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptemailpage%2Fbrowse 31 Opens a file dialog to select the e-mail program.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptemailpage%2Furl 27 Enter the e-mail program path and name.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fchange 51 Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
9 809226770 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fconnections 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 20 Enter the master password again.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 1a Enter the master password.
26 SVX_TABPAGE_RID_SVXPAGE_INET_SCRIPTING c1 Ги дефинира опциите за безбедност за зачувување документи и за отворање документи коишто содржат макроа.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fsavesenddocs 7d Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments.
9 703992332 4a Го отвора дијалогот Безбедност на макро.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenprinting 6b Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhensigning cb Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenpdf 93 Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fsavepassword bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmasterpassword 27 Opens the Enter Master Password dialog.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fremovepersonal e3 Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset Properties button on File - Properties - General.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fctrlclick 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmasterpassworddlg%2FMasterPasswordDialog 26 Enter the master password to continue.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fblockuntrusted 88 Blocks the use of links pointing to images not in the trusted locations defined on the Trusted Sources tab of the Macro Security dialog.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fpassword 8e Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fcharset 33 Select the appropriate character set for the export
25 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsavegrflocal dd Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasic 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasicwarning 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fignorefontnames 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Funknowntag 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fprintextension a2 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document (for example, table of contents with justified page numbers and dot leaders) is exported as well.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fnumbersenglishus 19b Ако не е избрано, броевите ќе бидат интерпретирани според поставувањето во Алатки - Опции - Поставувања за јазик - Јазик на - Поставување за локал. Ако е обележано, броевите ќе се интерпретираат според локалот „Англиски (САД)“.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2FOptHtmlPage 20 Defines settings for HTML pages.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions 143 Овие поставувања одредуваат на кој начин се ракува со текстуалните документи креирани во $[officename]. Исто така може да се дефинираат поставувања за тековниот текстуален документ.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fcomments 138 Ги прикажува белешките и скриптите што ги содржи документот. Белешките ќе бидат прикажани како обоени полиња. Кликнете двапати на некое од нив за да ги читате и уредувате.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ffieldcodes 4f Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fsmoothscroll 60 Ја активира функцијата за мазно движење на страници.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fdrawings 78 Ги прикажува цртежите и контролите што ги содржи Вашиот документ.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fmeasureunit 46 Ја одредува единицата за HTML-документи.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhelplines ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhrulercombobox a7 Го прикажува хоризонталниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulercombobox a3 Го прикажува вертикалниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulerright 61 Го порамнува вертикалниот линијар со десната страна.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2FViewOptionsPage 124 Ги дефинира стандардните поставувања за прикажување објекти во Вашите текстуални документи исто така и стандардните поставувања за елементите на прозорците.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fgraphics 3e Specifies whether to display images and objects on the screen.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ftables 5d Ги прикажува табелите содржани во Вашиот документ.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries 13c За да ги прикажете границите на табелите, кликнете со десното копче на која било табела и изберете Граници на табелa или во документ од Writer изберете Tабела - Граници на табелa.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fidxbox 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2FOptFontTabPage 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Findexheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardbox 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitleheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistbox 43 Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitlebox 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelbox 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ffax 11f Доколку сте инсталирале софтвер за факс на Вашиот компјутер и сакате да испратите факс директно од текстуалниот документ, тука изберете ја машината за факс.
2b SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ARB_NO 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbrochure 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frightpages 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2FPrintOptionsPage 7e Ги одредува поставувањата за печатење во текстуален или HTML-документ.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fgraphics 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frtl 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Finblack 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fformcontrols 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fpapertray a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fhiddentext 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fblankpages 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fleftpages 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
30 SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BACKGROUND 10d Одредува дали во испечатениот документ да се вклучат боите и објектите што се вметнати во подлогата на страницата (Форматирај - Страница - Подлога).
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ftextplaceholder 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffix 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolinsert 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2FOptTablePage 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fheader 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frepeatheader 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowmove 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffixprop 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowinsert 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolmove 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fdontsplit 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fborder 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumformatting 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fvar 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumfmtformatting 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumalignment 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursorinprot 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillspace 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffilltab 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillindent 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillmargin 102 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2FOptFormatAidsPage 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fparagraph 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhyphens 185 Specifies whether soft hyphens (called also as optional or discretionary hyphens) are displayed. These are hidden user-defined delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with soft hyphens are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a soft hyphen has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ftabs 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fspaces 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fnonbreak af Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursoronoff 1c Activates the direct cursor.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fbreak 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentext 66 Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentextfield 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddenparafield 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkpos 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchangedcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchanged 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fdeleted ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Finsert 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkcolor 43 Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2FOptRedLinePage 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fsquaremode 47 When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fusecharunit 99 When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fmetric 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatefields c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fnever 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fonrequest 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatecharts be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Falways 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ftab 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2Fdefault 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
3e SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_MERGE_PARA_DIST_PAGESTART b4 Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page is also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document.
34 SW%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_MERGE_PARA_DIST 79 Specifies whether to add MS Word-compatible spacing between paragraphs and tables in $[officename] Writer text documents.
2c SW_CHECKBOX_TP_OPTLOAD_PAGE_CB_TAB_ALIGNMENT 95 Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break.
2e SW_CHECKBOX_TP_OPTLOAD_PAGE_CB_PRINTER_METRICS 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2FOptCompatPage 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fapplyborder 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Flevel 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcharstyle 1e Specifies the character style.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fchapseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcategory 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fposition 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fobjects 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fnumbering 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2FOptCaptionPage 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
14 SID_SW_ONLINEOPTIONS 46 Defines the basic settings for $[officename] documents in HTML format.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 0 
34 SVX_NUMERICFIELD_RID_SVXPAGE_GRID_NUM_FLD_DIVISION_X 4c Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the X-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawy 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawx 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fgridvisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 0 
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsynchronize 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
34 SVX_NUMERICFIELD_RID_SVXPAGE_GRID_NUM_FLD_DIVISION_Y 4c Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the Y-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fusegridsnap 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2FOptGridPage cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Foutline 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fhscroll 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fsynczoom 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdiagram 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fobjgrf 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Ftblreg 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frangefind bf Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fclipmark f3 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fanchor 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2FTpViewPage 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fcolor 3d Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fnil 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frowcolheader 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fbreak 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdraw 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fguideline 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fformula 43 Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fannot d1 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fgrid db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 59 To display a note permanently, select the Show note command from the cell's context menu.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvscroll 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvalue 111 Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Freplwarncb 6d Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftextfmtcb 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fmarkhdrcb 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fexprefcb f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Feditmodecb 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftabmf 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fformatcb 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Falignlb 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Funitlb 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fadd 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fnew 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fcopyfrom 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fcopy 10d Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fentries 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Flists 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2FOptSortLists 9c All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2Fcolumns 56 Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2Frows 50 Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2FColOrRowDialog 2f Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fprec ae Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fgeneralprec dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Flookup 7d Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformulaliteral 66 Specifies that only literal strings are used when searching and also for character string comparisons.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformulawildcards 5e Specifies that wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
f HID_SCPAGE_CALC fb Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fsteps 2b Sets the maximum number of iteration steps.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fminchange a1 Specifies the difference between two iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdate1904 63 Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatestd 1c Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fiterate b1 Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcalc 57 Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatesc10 62 Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcase 64 Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformularegex 84 Specifies that regular expressions instead of simple wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fmatch 14e Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When both, the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box and the Enable wildcards in formulas box are marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fentries 35 Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Finsertions 3a Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fdeletions 39 Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fchanges 31 Specifies the color for changes of cell contents.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2FOptChangesPage 5c The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FprintCB e3 Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FsuppressCB 56 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FoptCalcPrintPage 31 Determines the printer settings for spreadsheets.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcompatibilitypage%2FOptCompatibilityPage 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptformula%2FOptFormula 49 Defines formula syntax options and loading options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdefaultpage%2FOptDefaultPage 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions db Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out, and if notes and handouts are always printed.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fhandlesbezier ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fruler 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fmoveoutline 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fdragstripes 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2FSdViewPage 26 Specifies the available display modes.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldbezangle 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
21 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fbigortho 16b Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
1e svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fortho 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldsnaparea cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldangle 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnappoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapframe 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapborder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
26 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnaphelplines 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
13 HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3a Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpapertryfrmprntrcb 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbackcb 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbrouchrb 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftilepgrb a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fprntopts 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagedefaultrb 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagenmcb 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdatecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffrontcb 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffittopgrb 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftimecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fblackwhiterb 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fhiddenpgcb 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdefaultrb 34 Specifies that you want to print in original colors.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fgrayscalerb 35 Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FcbCompatibility 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FOptSavePage 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fbackgroundback 4d Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Funits 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 5d Specifies whether to immediately switch to the text editing mode when clicking a text object.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fenremotcont 54 Specifies that you want to enable Bluetooth remote control while Impress is running.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fcopywhenmove 56 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fobjalwymov a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FscaleBox 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fstartwithwizard 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FmetricFields 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fdistrotcb 70 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions ae Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fzoom 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizescaled 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
2e STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_FRAME 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftext 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fnorightspaces 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizenormal 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftitle 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2FSmathSettings 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fdefault 4d Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fcolors 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_saveorig 11a Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2FOptFltrPage 61 Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA code.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fchecklbcontainer ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fctlsupport 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrencylb 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fignorelanguagechange dd Indicates whether changes to the system input language/keyboard will be ignored. If ignored, when new text is typed that text will follow the language of the document or current paragraph, not the current system language.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fwesternlanguage 4d Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fuserinterface 58 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Flocalesetting 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasiansupport 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdecimalseparator 7a Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2FOptLanguagesPage 4b Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdatepatterns cd Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasianlanguage 4b Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrentdoc 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcomplexlanguage 3e Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fend 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstandard 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Flanguage 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctkanacompression 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fnocompression 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstart 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharpunctkerning 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctcompression 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharkerning 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignoremiddledot 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchprolongedsoundmark 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fnumerals ac Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementvisual 54 The text cursor moves to the right with Arrow Right and to the left with Arrow Left.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Frestricted 4b Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementlogical 5d The text cursor moves to the text end with Arrow Right and to the text begin with Arrow Left.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fsequencechecking 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2FOptCTLPage 3c Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Ftimeout 45 Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fenablepooling 73 Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fconnectionpooling 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
9 809226770 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
9 809226766 3a Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry.
9 809226765 35 Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry.
5 35535 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2Fname 52 Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2Fbrowse 3b Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_proc 37 Automatically insert closing statements for procedures.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_paren 25 Automatically close open parenthesis.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_quotes 20 Automatically close open quotes.
31 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fextendedtypes_enable 2c Allow UNO object types as valid Basic types.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautocorrect 3b Correct cases of Basic variables and keywords while typing.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fcodecomplete_enable 22 Display methods of a Basic object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexperimental 1c Enable experimental features
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fclasspath 1c Opens the Class Path dialog.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fmacrorecording 16 Enable macro recording
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fparameters 27 Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fadd 38 Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavas 24 Select the JRE that you want to use.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexpertconfig 5e Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavaenabled 40 Allows you to run Java applications and applets in %PRODUCTNAME.
2a cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Fpreferences 3f List the preferences organized hierarchically in a tree layout.
2b cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2FsearchButton 3d Click to search your preference text in the Preferences tree.
24 cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Freset 28 Undo changes done so far in this dialog.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Fedit 26 Opens a dialog to edit the preference.
2a cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2FsearchEntry 38 Type the preference you want to display in the text area
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexpertconfig 5e Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Ffolder 35 Select a folder and add the folder to the class path.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Fremove 64 Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Farchive 4f Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path.
30 SVX_EDIT_RID_SVXPAGE_INET_SCRIPTING_ED_CLASSPATH 3f Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fremovebtn 29 Deletes the selected JRE start parameter.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Feditbtn 44 Opens a dialog where the selected JRE start parameter can be edited.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fassignbtn 31 Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fassignlist 72 Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fparameterfield 8e Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Flow c5 A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fmed e6 Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation.
26 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fhigh bf Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
27 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fvhigh 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2FSecurityLevelPage 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovefile 44 Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations.
29 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Faddfile 5e Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute.
2b xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Flocations c4 Trusted file locations are used only if the security level is set to "very high". With this setting, document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovecert 47 Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fcertificates 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
2a xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fviewcert 3f Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2FSecurityTrustPage 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserverauthentication 72 Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fport 14 Enter the SMTP port.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Ftest 44 Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fsecure 39 When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplyto 2c Enter the address to use for e-mail replies.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fdisplayname 10 Enter your name.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserver 1b Enter the SMTP server name.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplytocb 64 Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Faddress 26 Enter your e-mail address for replies.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2FMailConfigPage 10 Enter your name.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchecknow 35 Проверката ќе се изведе сега.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feverymonth 4a Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш месечно.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryweek 81 Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш неделно. Ова е стандардно поставување.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryday 48 Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш дневно.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautocheck 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
34 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2FOptOnlineUpdatePage 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpersonalization_tab%2Fown_persona 53 Choose this option to open the “Select Firefox Theme” dialog and pick your own.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpersonalization_tab%2Fdefault_persona 27 Display the system theme, if available.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fselect_persona_dialog%2Fframe4 56 Shows a random choice of nine themes based on the categories displayed in the buttons.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fselect_persona_dialog%2Fsearch_term 2f Type or paste the URL of the theme’s webpage.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpersonalization_tab%2Fno_persona 58 The toolbars’ background inherits the background settings of your desktop environment.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finpassword 13 Enter the password.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finusername 28 Enter the user name for the IMAP server.
54 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2FAuthenticationSettingsDialog 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
46 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fauthentication 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
4e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fseparateauthentication 3d Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fusername 28 Enter the user name for the SMTP server.
43 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Foutpassword 25 Enter the password for the user name.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fport 2a Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fimap 32 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fpop3 33 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fsmtpafterpop 50 Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fserver 38 Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Fstop 36 Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Ferrors 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2FTestMailSettings 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
21 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2FCertPage 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
1f xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fstatus 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
23 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fsignatures 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
2d xmlsecurity%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2Fvaluedetails 45 Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard.
2c xmlsecurity%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2FCertDetails 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
2f xmlsecurity%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2Ftablecontainer 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 61 The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate.
